Quarterlytics / Technology / One

One

tne · ASX Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker tne
Exchange ASX
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · One
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual 
Report

The future  
of enterprise  
software, today

U P
12%

F Y 1 6
$192.6M

F Y 1 7
$231.1M

F Y 1 8
$221M

F Y 1 9
$241.8M

F Y 2 0
$269.8M

U P
13%

F Y 1 6
$53.2M

F Y 1 7
$58.0M

F Y 1 8
$50.8M

F Y 1 9
$76.3M

F Y 2 0
$86.0M

U P
32%

F Y 1 6
$24.5M

F Y 1 7
$50.7M

F Y 1 8
$70.4M

F Y 1 9
$101.7M

F Y 2 0
$134.6M

29%

F Y 1 6
21%

F Y 1 7
21%

F Y 1 8
22%

F Y 1 9
27%

F Y 2 0
29%

These graphs should be read in conjunction with the Financial Highlights table on p8.

Revenue  
from SaaS  
& Continuing 
Business  
up 12%

Underlying 
Profit
Before Tax2
up 13%

SaaS Annual
Recurring 
Revenue
up 32%

Underlying 
Profit Before 
Tax Margin
is 29%

What’s  
inside

At a glance 

Financial highlights

Letter to shareholders

Global SaaS ERP solution

Enterprise  
02
software,  
06
incredibly  
10
simple.

20

Our strategy

Our growth

Our operations

Our people

TechnologyOne Foundation

Financial statements

Directors’ report

Corporate governance statement

Voluntary Tax Transparency Report 

Financial statements

Directors’ declaration

Auditor’s independence declaration

Auditor’s report

Shareholder information

Corporate directory

Corporate calendar

28

34

40

52

62

66
68
98
108
109
136
137
138
143
144
145

Transforming business, making life simple

1

01
01
At a
At a
glance
glance

2

3

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleOur 
finances

$68.1M

R&D investment up 13%  
(22% of revenue)

of record profit 11

Consecutive years  

%

Continuing Business12UP

Revenue from SaaS & 

%

8UP

Dividend 
growth 

%

Net assets33UP

%

32UP

SaaS Annual  
Recurring Revenue

Profitable since

1992

29%

Underlying Profit 
Before Tax Margin

UP

38 %

Consulting  
Profit Before Tax

$125.2M 44 %

Cash and cash equivalents 

Return on equity

%
13UP

Underlying Profit  
Before Tax2

%

10UP

Total ARR 

Breaks evenUK

Our vision
As the only company offering a true 
global Software as a Service (SaaS) ERP 
solution across the entire enterprise,  
we are transforming business and 
making life simple.

Our difference
We are the only vendor that develops, 
sells, implements, supports and runs 
a fully integrated suite of enterprise 
software solutions. Our global SaaS 
ERP solutions span the entire enterprise 
and allow our customers to embrace 
the digital revolution and an exciting 
new world of possibilities in a cloud-
first, mobile-first world.

Our reach
TechnologyOne has a global presence 
throughout Australia, New Zealand, 
Asia and the United Kingdom.

Our culture
Our international team is made up of 
more than 1,200 passionate individuals. 
We believe in investing in our people, 
and we do this with a wide range 
of initiatives such as O-Week, R&D 
Showcases and leadership courses. 

To foster a customer-oriented  
culture, we developed the Compelling 
Customer Experience program. The 
program supports and encourages  
our team members so that they can 
deliver outstanding customer service 
every day.

Compelling 
Customer 
experience
We continue to recognise that our 
customers are our compass for the 
decisions we make, the people we 
employ and the processes we create. 
This is why we continue to invest in our 
Compelling Customer Experience (CCE) 
program, which provides our people 
with ongoing development and support 
in delivering outstanding customer 
experiences.

Providing a compelling customer 
experience is fundamental to the way 
TechnologyOne does business and 
positions us well to attract customers 
away from our competitors.

Our market-leading  
solutions and 
products
As the leading supplier of enterprise 
software solutions for more than 
1,200 large-scale companies, and with 
more than 30 years’ success in the 
business, we have developed a deep 
understanding of our key markets.

We offer our customers a range 
of industry-leading preconfigured 
enterprise solutions. Our solutions are 
effective and our implementations are 
streamlined, which reduces time, cost 
and risk for customers. We also offer 
a comprehensive suite of enterprise 
software products.

Our markets
 • Local government

 • Education

 • Federal government

 • Health and community services

 • Asset and project intensive 

industries

 • Corporates and financial services

Our preconfigured 
solutions
 • OneCouncil

 • OneEducation

 • OneGovernment

 • OneCare

 • OneAsset

 • OneCorporate

Our products
 • Corporate Performance 

Management 

 • Enterprise Content Management 

 • Human Resources & Payroll 

 • Spatial  

 • Supply Chain Management 

 • Strategic Asset Management 

 • Enterprise Cash Receipting 

 • Enterprise Asset Management 

 • Financials 

 • Property & Rating 

 • Student Management 

 • Business Analytics 

 • Enterprise Budgeting 

 • Performance Planning 

Our research  
and development
We continue to focus our research 

and development (R&D) efforts on 

new and emerging technologies, 

including cloud-based technologies, 

artificial intelligence, machine learning 

and other innovations. Our Australian-

owned commercial R&D centre is 

the largest of its kind, with offshoot 

facilities in Indonesia and Vietnam.

New ideas,  
new concepts
We are committed to a continuous cycle 
of redeveloping our software platform. 
This process leaves no line of code 
untouched and ensures that we are free 
to embrace new ideas, concepts and 
technologies – rather than needing to 
retain legacy systems. Over the past 30 
years we have completely redeveloped 
our software platform four times.

4

5

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple02
02
Financial
Financial
highlights
highlights

6

7

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 2020

2019

Growth on 
last year

15-year 
compound 
growth

2018 

2017

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

Comparable**

Reported

269,774 

 241,790

12%

-

221,046

231,151

192,657

175,279

140,024

128,226

117,567

110,348

 299,018 

 286,164 

4%

12%

 254,491 

 273,253 

 249,018 

 218,724 

 195,124 

 180,591 

 169,070 

 156,742 

Revenue - 
SaaS and  
Continuing 
Business

Total 
Revenue

One vision. 
One vendor.  
One code-line. 
One experience.

SaaS ARR1

 134,557 

 101,677 

32%

 221,908 

 202,480 

10%

-

-

 70,372 

 50,701 

 24,486 

 14,265 

 173,912 

 153,896 

 126,996 

 108,853 

 -   

 -   

 -   

 -   

 -   

 -   

 -   

 -   

 68,062 

 60,124 

13%

13%

 54,042 

 49,856 

 46,009 

 41,038 

 37,873 

 35,595 

 33,524 

 31,796 

 86,070 

 76,389 

13%

13%

 50,807 

 58,019 

 53,240 

 46,494 

 40,235 

 35,097 

 30,324 

 26,675 

 82,470 

 76,389 

8%

12%

 50,807 

 58,019 

 53,240 

 46,494 

 40,235 

 35,097 

 30,324 

 26,675 

 62,945 

 58,459 

8%

13%

 47,681 

 44,494 

 41,344 

 35,785 

 30,967 

 26,984 

 23,559 

 20,326 

 19.75 

 18.43 

7%

12%

 15.10 

 14.18 

 13.26 

 11.57 

 10.06 

 8.78 

 7.73 

 6.71 

 12.88 

 11.93 

8%

10%

 11.02 

 10.20 

 9.45 

 8.78 

 8.16 

 5.60 

 5.09 

 6.12 

Annual 
Recurring 
Revenue 
(ARR)1

R&D  
Investment*

Underlying 
Profit Before 
Tax2

Net Profit  
Before Tax

Net Profit  
After Tax

Earnings  
Per Share 
(cents)

Total 
Dividends 
(cents per 
share)

Dividend  
Payout Ratio

65%

65%

Return on  
Equity

44%

55%

-

-

-

-

73%

72%

72%

76%

81%

64%

66%

91%

46%

28%

31%

30%

30%

31%

32%

30%

Cash & Cash  
Equivalents

 125,244 

 105,046 

19%

11%

 104,322 

 93,383 

 82,588 

 75,536 

 80,209 

 65,397 

 51,133 

 45,357 

Net Assets

 142,168 

 106,857 

33%

9%

 103,480 

 157,520 

 138,494 

 117,940 

 104,499 

 87,736 

 73,997 

 68,370 

The table above shows previously reported results to FY17. Results for those years have not been restated for AASB15. 

*Before capitalistion. 

**2018 Comparable applies AASB15. It also assumes non-IFRS pro forma capitalisation of R&D costs (50%) for the FY18 year and is unaudited. As a SaaS company, R&D costs are capitalised from FY19 onwards, which is the common  

practice of our SaaS peers. We measure our performance using the comparable method because it is a better reflection of the performance of our business, setting a higher bar for the prior comparable period (FY18) than the statutory 

reporting. It allows for a ‘like for like’ comparison of the performance of the business, assuming R&D costs (50%) were capitalised in FY18. This is the basis used for all comparable reporting throughout this document.

1ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end.

2Underlying profit excludes impact of once-off increased provision for a civil employment matter of $3.6m.

8

Transforming business, making life simple

9

2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report03
03
Letter to 
Letter to 
shareholders
shareholders

10

11

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleLetter to 
shareholders

Our clarity and continuity of vision 
is the key to our ongoing long-term 
success. Our vision is based on our 
unique ‘Power of One’ business model 
that sees TechnologyOne as the only 
enterprise vendor providing a totally 
integrated experience to customers, 
in which we build, market, sell, 
implement, support and run our world-
class enterprise software. 

The strength of our product offerings, 
our enterprise vision, vertical market 
focus and the resilient nature of the 
enterprise software market are the 
foundation for our continuing success. 
When coupled with our innovation, 
creativity and substantial ongoing 
investment into new and emerging 
technologies, we are well positioned 
for strong growth in the coming years.

On behalf of TechnologyOne 
Limited (TechnologyOne) we  
are pleased to announce our  
11th consecutive year of record 
profit, record revenues and 
record SaaS fees. 
Our global SaaS ERP solution is transforming our customers’ 
business and makes life simple for them. 

When COVID-19 hit, our solution enabled our SaaS customers 
to seamlessly shift to remote working. COVID-19 has reinforced 
the significant value proposition of our global SaaS ERP 
solution which provides mission critical systems and enables 
our customers’ staff to work on any device, anywhere, any 
time, seamlessly without interruptions. This has also resonated 
strongly with the market, driving our continuing strong results. 

Underlying Profit up 13%
Our Underlying Profit Before Tax was up 13% on the prior  
year, which was at the top end of guidance and underpinned  
by the continuing fast growth of the TechnologyOne global  
SaaS ERP solution.  

TechnologyOne SaaS  
ARRi grows 32%  

The TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP solution is growing very 
fast with SaaS annual recurring revenue (ARR)i of $134.6m, up 
32%. This is also discussed in more detail later.

Results summary
Key results were as follows: 

 • Underlying Profit Before Tax1 of $86.1m, up 13% 

 • Expenses of $216.5m, up 3% 

 • Revenue from our SaaS and Continuing Business of 

 • Cash Flow Generation4 of $66.4m, up 49%

$269.8m, up 12%

 • SaaS Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)2 of $134.6m,up 32%

 • Reported Profit Before Tax of $82.5m, up 8%1

 • Total Revenue3 of $299.0m, up 4% 

 • Cash and Cash Equivalents of $125.2m, up 19%

 • Total Dividend of 12.88cps, up 8% 

 • R&D investment of $68.1m before capitalisation,  

up 13%, which is 22% of revenue

1 For details on Profit Before Tax and Underlying Profit refer to the following pages

2 ARR represents future contracted annual revenue at year end. This is a non-IFRS financial measure and is unaudited

3 Includes other income of $0.7m

4 Cash Flow Generation is Cash flow from operating activities less capitalised development costs. This is a non-IFRS financial measure and is unaudited

12

13

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleDividend up 8%

TechnologyOne SaaS ARRi grows 32% 

In light of the company’s strong results, and our confidence going forward, the dividend for the full year has increased to 12.88 cents  
per share, up 8% on the prior year.

Compound 
growth 8%

UP 8%

UP 8%

UP 8%

2.00

UP 8%

2.00

UP 8%

2.00

UP 
46%

2.00

UP 8%

2.00

UP 7%

1.50

DOWN 
17%

UP 
10%

1.50

4.20

4.62

5.09

5.60

6.16

6.78

7.45

8.20

9.02

11.93

12.88

FY10

FY11

FY12

FY13

FY14

FY15

FY16

FY17

FY18

FY19

FY20

Dividend

Special Dividend

Continuing strong performance 
TechnologyOne has consistently delivered strong results since listing on the ASX in 1999. Our ability to deliver these results for 20+ years is due 
to our clear vision, strategy, culture and our significant investment in R&D. This is discussed in more detail in the Our Strategy section on page 28.

We see continuing strong growth in the future, and like we have in the past 32 years, we expect to double in size again in the next five years.

Underlying  
NPAT up 13%
10YR Compound Growth 14%

U P
13%

The TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP solution is growing very fast 
with SaaS Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)i of $134.6m, up 32%. This 
growth is all organic and includes no acquisitions.

We added 104 enterprise customers this year to our global SaaS ERP 
solution and we now have 539 large scale enterprise customers, with 
hundreds of thousands of users; making it the largest single instance 
SaaS ERP offering in Australia. 

Our global SaaS ERP solution is delivering a compelling value 
proposition for our customers, providing them any device, any time 
access from anywhere around the globe, as well as a simple and cost-
effective way to run their enterprise. This is allowing our customers 
to innovate and meet the challenges ahead with greater agility and 
speed, without having to worry about underlying technologies. We 
take care of all of this, making life simple for them. This is discussed in 
more detail in the global SaaS ERP solution section on page 20.

This year we continued to win new, large enterprise customers from 
our competitors. 30+ organisations replaced our competitors’ systems, 
including systems from Oracle, SAP, Microsoft, and Infor. 

TechnologyOne continued to dominate in the local government sector, 
where we closed 40 major deals with $45+ million in total contract 
value. We have more than 300 council customers.

In the Higher Education sector, we closed 10 major deals with $10m in 
total contract value, cementing our position as the dominant provider 
to the APAC Higher Education sector.

U P
32%

F Y 1 5
14.3M

F Y 1 6
24.5M

F Y 1 7
50.7M

F Y 1 8
70.4M

F Y 1 9
101.7M

F Y 2 0
134.6M

Recurring Revenue underpins quality of our business 

As our SaaS business continues to grow quickly, the quality of this revenue stream is exceptionally high, given its recurring contractual nature, 
combined with our very low churn rate of <1%.

Today our Total Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)i has hit $222m and is set to exceed $500m in the coming years.

Our ARRi stands at 86% of Total Revenue1 which means the majority of our revenue is locked-in at the start of the financial year, which positions  
us well to achieve strong continuing growth in the new year.

1 Excludes consulting revenue as it flows from business wins

$17.8m $20.3m
FY10

FY11

$23.6m $27.0m $31.0m $35.8m $41.3m $44.5m $51.0m $58.5m $65.4m
FY16

FY20

FY15

FY19

FY18

FY12

FY14

FY13

FY17

14

15

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleRevenue from our SaaS and Continuing Business, a key measure, up 12%

Investment in R&D up 13% 

U P
12%

TechnologyOne invested $68.1 million in R&D this year, up 13%. This 
was significantly higher than our normal benchmark for R&D growth 
of 8%, as we took the opportunity this year to accelerate R&D into a 
number of new and exciting areas.

We continue to invest in new exciting ideas and innovation including 
our new Digital Experience Platform for Local Government, which we 
will ship in 2021. 

This year we achieved a significant milestone, becoming the first and 
only global SaaS ERP solution to be assessed for IRAP PROTECTED. 
We continue to invest millions of dollars and set the bar higher each 
year as we deliver the most trusted SaaS solution to our customers. 

It is not feasible for individual organisations to keep up with increasing 
costs and complexity of cyber security unless they have adopted a 
SaaS first strategy.

Our R&D is also focused on extending the functionality and 
capabilities of our global SaaS ERP solution. 

Our R&D program in the coming years continues to be at the leading 
edge of our industry as we embrace new technologies, new concepts 
and new paradigms. 

We expect R&D growth next year to return back to the benchmark 
growth of 8% or less.

20%

20%

20%

20%

19%

21%

20%

20%

21%

21%

UP 8%

UP 12%

UP 8%

U P
11%

$60.1m

22%

U P
13%

$68.1m

UP 17%

UP 5%

UP 6%

up 6%

UP 8%

$37.1m

$32.1m

$27.2m
FY10

$31.8m
FY11

$33.5m
FY12

$35.6m
FY13

$37.9m $41.0m
FY14
FY15

$46.0m
FY16

$49.9m
FY17

$54m
FY18

$28.0m
FY19

$30.9m
FY20

Expensed R&D

Capitalised Development

R&D Expenditure % of Total Revenue

Reported Profit up 8%

Reported Profit was impacted by a once-off increase in legal provisions, due to an unexpected judgement against TechnologyOne in a civil 
employment case. The company has retained very experienced counsel to expediate an appeal to the Full Federal Court. Our notice of appeal 
alleges 12 errors of law and fact. TechnologyOne has previously issued an ASX statement on this matter. As the matter remains before the Courts, 
we are unable to comment further at this time.

Strong Balance Sheet and Cash Flows

TechnologyOne continues to have a strong balance sheet with net assets of $142m up 33% and cash and cash equivalents of $125.2 million 
up 19%. Cash Flow Generationii was once again strong at $66.4m million for the full year, versus a Net Profit After Tax of $62.9m million. 
TechnologyOne continues its long history of strong Cash Flow Generationii which will continue to grow in line with Net Profit After Tax.

Total Revenue was up 4%, but we believe this is not a true indication of 
the growth of our business, as it includes our legacy Licence business, 
which we are aggressively reducing, as we grow our  
SaaS business.

As planned our legacy Licence business was down 34% ($14.7m), as 
we continued to transition our customers to SaaS. If we remove the 
legacy Licence business from both FY19 and FY20, our Revenue from 
SaaS and Continuing Business, which is a key measure of the strength 
of our business, has grown 12%. 

The reason we are aggressively pursuing our SaaS strategy is 
because of the significant benefits to both our customers and 
TechnologyOne. We note that the recurring nature of SaaS revenue, 
means it is a much higher quality revenue compared to legacy licence 
fee revenue. 

F Y 1 6
192.6M

F Y 1 7
231.1M

F Y 1 8
221M

F Y 1 9
241.8M

F Y 2 0
269.8M

UK breaks even
The UK regionalisation of our global SaaS ERP solution is nearing completion, and we have seen our UK business continue to grow,  
with SaaS ARR of $7.5m, up 22%. We delivered a breakeven result and we see significant opportunities in the coming years. 

We see the UK as a platform for significant growth for 
TechnologyOne in the coming years. Our ‘blue ocean’ 
strategy is gaining traction, which is to provide a global 
SaaS ERP solution for the higher education and local 
government sectors.  Important to the success of this 
strategy was the introduction of our Human Resources & 
Payroll (HRP) and Student Management products to this 
market. The regionalisation of these products for the UK 
market is nearing completion, and we will work with early 
adopters in the UK to establish these products.

As we bring more products into the UK market this 
increases our product offering and also allows us to move 
into the less crowded ‘blue ocean’ space, as we will be one 
of only a few enterprise vendors in the UK market.

As previously foreshadowed, the challenge for us has been 
to build a successful and profitable consulting practice in 
the UK. This was not an insignificant undertaking. 

We expect to deliver significant growth in the UK in the  
coming years. 

UP 13%
$9.7m

UP 10%
$7.7m

$76.4m

$86.1m

$78.3m

$86.0m

UP 103%
$1.9m

$0.1m

($1.9m)

Company

APAC

UK

FY19

FY20

Consulting Profit Before Tax of $13.7m, up 38%

Our Consulting division delivered Profit Before Tax of $13.7m, up 38% 
through continued improvement in culture, systems and processes 
and disciplined use of our solution implementation methodology.  We 
delivered all go lives and continue to support our customers remotely 
during the COVID-19 restrictions. The turnaround of the UK Consulting 
division continued during the year, profit improving $1.6m to deliver a 
breakeven result.  The total Consulting group Profit Before Tax Margin 
has improved from 8% in 2017 to 22% in 2020.  Our Application 
Managed Services business for existing customers is moving to 
recurring revenue with $14m now locked in as recurring revenue2. 

2Not included in our Total ARR.

UP 38%
$3.8m

UP 19%
$2.2m

UP 97%
$1.6m

$9.9m

$13.7m

$11.5m

$13.7m

Company

APAC

UK

($1.6m)

($0.0m)

FY19

FY20

16

17

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleOutlook for FY 2021
As we have seen over the last few years, the enterprise software 
market continues to remain resilient, with our products providing  
our customers the opportunity to reduce their costs, streamline  
their business and improve their efficiencies in a challenging 
economic time. 

The TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP solution is driving our continuing 
success. As a result, TechnologyOne’s sales pipeline of opportunities 
for 2021 is strong and this positions us for continuing strong profit 
growth in FY21. 

Our SaaS business will continue to grow strongly and profitably.

We also expect to see continuing strong growth in the UK market.

The company will provide further guidance at both the Annual  
General Meeting and with the FY21 first half results.

Afterword 
To continue to succeed we must continue to innovate and focus on 
building beautiful software that is incredibly simple and easy for our 
customers to use. Our software must work on any device, anywhere, 
at any time if we are to enable our customers to embrace the exciting 
future that is possible with the digital revolution. 

Also, we must continue to earn the right to be the enterprise software 
partner for our customers. At every touchpoint we have with our 
customers, we must strive to make things simpler for them and give 
them a great experience.

A few years ago, we set an ambitious goal to transform business and 
make life simple for our customers. We are now making this a reality. 

This would not be possible without the talented and committed 
people who make up TechnologyOne.

I would also like to thank you, our shareholders, for your continuing 
support.

Adrian Di Marco 
Executive Director

Edward Chung 
Chief Executive Officer

Underlying Profit Before Tax 
Margin Increases to 29%

Underlying Profit Before Tax Margin increased to 29%, compared 
to 27% pcp. We see margins continuing to improve to 35%+ in the 
coming years driven by the significant economies of scale from  
our single instance multi-tenanted global SaaS ERP solution. We  
are on track to double the size of our business once again in the  
next five years.

18%

19%

21%

21%

21%

21% 22%

17%

29%

27%

FY11

FY12

FY13

FY14

FY15

FY16

FY17 FY18 FY19 FY20

Executive remuneration
This year we made further enhancements to our Remuneration  
Report and continued to evolve it based on feedback from our 
shareholders. We have also engaged external consultants to assist  
us with these changes.

At a time when many businesses have struggled during the  
pandemic, TechnologyOne has continued to perform strongly.  
Given the exceptional results delivered during the COVID pandemic, 
with Underlying Profit up 13%, SaaS ARRi growth of 32%, Consulting 
Profit growth of 38%, Underlying Profit Before Tax Margin growth  
to 29% and a breakeven result for the UK, the Board exercised 
discretion in the achievement of LTI targets to ensure our executives 
were appropriately rewarded and remained fully engaged with 
our business going forward, which is discussed in detail in our 
Remuneration Report.

There is clear alignment between the performance of the business 
and executive remuneration. FY20 total executive remuneration 
packages for continuing executives grew by 5%, after Board 
discretion, while the company’s reported profit grew 8%, and 
underlying profit grew by 13%.

Audit tender
TechnologyOne has taken advice from shareholders in relation to the 
external audit of TechnologyOne given the long tenure of our existing 
Auditors. During the year we have put the external audit services to 
tender. A detailed and carefully considered process was undertaken.

As a result of this tender, EY has been successful in continuing with 
our audit. Their significant experience in auditing SaaS companies in 
both Australia and globally was an important consideration as well as 
their exceptional references with other ASX companies.

Environment, Social, Governance
TechnologyOne is committed to its ESG obligations, beyond just 
regulatory requirements. TechnologyOne is proud to go another step 
forward in 2020 and is now Carbon Neutral for the 12 months ending 
30 June 2020 and is applying for Climate Active certification. 

While the TechnologyOne operations do not have a material impact  
on the environment, we acknowledge that it is the changing attitude  
of many that will have a material impact on reducing climate change.  

Please refer to the Company’s website at: https://www.
technologyonecorp.com/company/investors/corporate-governance  
for our Sustainability Report and Corporate Governance Statement.

Board renewal 
Given TechnologyOne is such a significant R&D and innovation-led 
business, coupled with our long track record of profitable growth,  
we have taken a cautious and measured approach to the renewal 
of our Board, to ensure a smooth transition. We have made good 
progress again this year with a new and highly experienced 
independent director, Mr Peter Ball, previously a partner at KPMG.  
We plan to add another independent director in the next 12 months 
which will see our Board then have five new independent directors.

Kevin Blinco, a long serving director, will not seek re-election  
at the AGM. We would like to take this opportunity to thank Kevin 
Blinco for his significant contribution to TechnologyOne and the Board.  

TechnologyOne Foundation
The TechnologyOne Foundation defines who we are as a company 
and is an important driver of the culture and values of our company.

We are committed to making a difference to underprivileged and at-
risk youths, by empowering them to transform their lives and create 
their own pathways of success. We believe that it is through youth that 
we can have the greatest impact on the future. We have an ambitious 
goal of helping 500,000 children and their families out of poverty, 
which we are on track to achieve. 

An important part of the TechnologyOne Foundation is supporting 
great Australians, doing great work both locally and internationally, 
which includes the Fred Hollows Foundation, School of St Jude, 
Opportunity International and Solar Buddy. 

The Foundation will continue to grow with TechnologyOne through 
our commitment to the 1% pledge – 1% profit, 1% product and 1% time.  
This represents a $2m + commitment each year.  The Foundation will 
continue to shape the DNA of our company and staff. This is discussed 
in more detail in the TechnologyOne Foundation section on page 62.

Our people and culture
Our people solve incredibly complex business problems for our 
customers and have delivered our massively broad and deep 
global SaaS ERP. We compete and win against the world’s largest 
multinational software companies who have R&D teams with tens of 
thousands of staff.

We continue to invest in our people and culture initiatives including 
our award-winning programs such as O-week, Graduate Program, 
Buddy program, Hack days, Town Halls and Regional Days to highlight 
a few. We also recognise those team members who live our values 
and demonstrate the TechnologyOne way through our annual 
MARVEL awards.  

TechnologyOne conducts a continual eNPS survey to measure each 
team and to build our strong and unique culture. All of these initiatives 
have resulted in TechnologyOne being once again independently 
recognized as an employer of choice. This is discussed in more detail 
in the Our People section on page 52.

18

Transforming business, making life simple

19

iARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual 
revenue at year end

iiCash Flow Generation is cash flow from operating activities less capitalised development 
costs. This is not IFRS financial measure and is unaudited.

2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report04
04
Global SaaS 
Global SaaS 
ERP solution
ERP solution

My Outstandings
My Outstandings

14  Awaiting Approval
14  Awaiting Approval

78  In Progress
78  In Progress

20

21

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleReportingReporting“

COVID-19 has highlighted the 
opportunity and benefits of providing 
access for staff wherever they are 
located. The pandemic and its impact, 
have definitely helped confirm the 
business case for moving to Software as 
a Service and a web-based portal.

Helen Howard
Head of Finance  
North Wales Fire & Rescue

”

TechnologyOne’s global SaaS ERP solution delivers the 
 full functionality of ERP on any device, without compromise.  
Our Software as a Service (SaaS) runs one global code line, 
allowing us to continuously deliver new innovations to our 
customers, who benefit from the scale of our investment as  
an enterprise vendor. 

Our solution leads the market because we own, build and 
support our own software. We take complete responsibility 
for providing the processing power, software and services, 
including backup, recovery, upgrade and support services  
for our SaaS customers. Other ERP providers fail to deliver  
the same economies of scale and cost efficiencies because  
they use cloud hosting and handcraft each customer’s 
environment individually. 

Our SaaS ERP solution is a single instance of software  
delivered globally, with a mass production line of servers 
running thousands of customers’ organisations. It produces 
substantial economies of scale, creating cost efficiencies that 
hosting providers cannot come close to, and a level of service, 
security, reliability, scalability and future proofing that would not 
be otherwise possible. 

TechnologyOne makes a substantial investment each year 
in ongoing R&D, to continue to improve our software and to 
capitalise on new technologies, concepts and ideas. Our global 
SaaS ERP solution provides a compelling value proposition to 
our customers, giving them what is essentially a very simple, 
cost effective and highly scalable model of computing. 

Our customers gain access to two releases of software per 
year that delivers new features, functionality and concepts, as 
well as access to the TechnologyOne University for ‘just-in-
time’ training. This is all provided standard as part of our SaaS 
solution, and we guarantee it will be future proof. Our customers 
do not need to do anything to seamlessly get these new 
releases into production. 

With our configuration-driven software design, all our customers’ 
unique configuration information is stored in their own 
dedicated and secure database. This is also the case for our 
customers’ transactional data, allowing us deliver personalised 
service at scale.  

Our approach to SaaS ERP is a key part of TechnologyOne’s 
ongoing success, with our subscription revenue now 
representing 86 per cent of our total revenue. In FY20,  
we gained 104 new SaaS customers, joining many of our  
long-standing customers on the journey from on-premise  
to cloud-based solutions.  

Our SaaS ERP has received international recognition for 
software innovation from the Australian Business Awards, the 
UK Cloud Awards, the SaaS Awards and Amazon Web Services.  

Our latest release of TechnologyOne SaaS, 2020B, continues to 
deliver further economies of scale and enhanced security. We 
are now working on the next generation of our SaaS solution, 
2021A. The pace at which we are innovating is accelerating, and 
we are seeing many opportunities to continue to improve the 
features, speed, security, availability and scalability of our SaaS 
solution for our customers. 

TechnologyOne is at the very forefront 
of delivering the benefits of mass 
production to the enterprise software 
industry. As we have seen in other 
industries, the economies of scale of 
mass production will change the face 
of the software industry.

We are excited by the opportunities the TechnologyOne SaaS 
ERP solution offers not only to our customers, but to us as well. 
It will allow us to streamline our operations, reduce our costs, 
improve our customers’ experience, as well as reduce the time 
to market for new features and functions. It will allow us to 
become more creative, more innovative and work in real time 
with our customers. 

Any device, anywhere,  
at any time
TechnologyOne is the only enterprise vendor delivering 100  
per cent of its enterprise software on smart mobile devices—
with no carve outs or exceptions. Customers have access to  
the full functionality of our software on any device, anywhere,  
at any time.

Organisations can embrace iPad, iPhone and Android devices 
as part of their enterprise solution and our adaptive screen 
design guarantees a great user experience regardless of the 
device. Because the experience is tied to the user, not the 
device, an employee can move seamlessly from one device to 
another without interrupting their work. With its incredibly simple 
design, our SaaS ERP has created a new standard in enterprise 
software, giving us a significant competitive advantage. For 
customers undertaking digital transformations, this is the key  

to future success.

22 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

23

Transforming business, making life simpleDXP (Digital Experience 
Platform)
TechnologyOne’s Digital Experience Platform (DXP) is a 
frictionless mobile app experience that harnesses new 
technologies and leverages the power of enterprise software. 
DXP will digitally enable every stakeholder throughout their 
organisation - be it an employee, customer, supplier, student 
or ratepayer - substantially streamlining their business and 
improving their experience. Artificial intelligence (AI) and 
machine learning (ML) are integral parts of our DXP.

TechnologyOne has released to early adopters the next stage 
of our DXP, and progressed the first two DXPs - DXP Meetings 
and DXP Expenses - into general release.  We continue to 
invest in DXP, and our DXP for ratepayers and  
local government will ship in 2021. 

“The rollout of DXP Meetings has only 
increased the appetite to modernise other 
areas of the council and has certainly driven  
us to explore other TechnologyOne solutions.”

Sarelle Sinclair 
Senior Business Services Officer 
Tablelands Regional Council

“We are always looking for opportunities 
to improve business processes. Being an 
early adopter allowed Council to ensure real 
benefits could be realised immediately and 
that the most efficient and sustainable solution 
was delivered.”

Adele Taylor 
Manager Business Information Solutions 
Shellharbour City Council

Accelerating digital 
transformation
COVID-19 has accelerated digital transformation  
throughout the world and has validated our strategy  
here at TechnologyOne. Our enterprise customers are 
increasingly realising the financial and operational benefits 
of a cloud-first, mobile-first model. SaaS transforms the way 
organisations interact with their customers and communities, 
which is why more of our on-premise customers are 
transitioning to the cloud.

Our customers tell us that adopting SaaS gives them  
new capabilities and saves them millions of dollars  
compared to equivalent on-premise deployments.

As the world pivots to operate in the ‘new normal’, with 
remote working quickly becoming the norm, the efficiencies 
TechnologyOne’s SaaS Platform offers have become even 
more essential to our customers.

We have also accelerated digital engagement internally, finding 
new virtual ways to engage, connect and achieve outcomes, 
with our Consulting team continuing to deliver projects 100 
per cent remotely, as well as our Sales and Support teams 
continuing to remotely welcome new customers and support 
existing customers so that their businesses could continue 
to operate. We redefined the way we deliver events, both 
internally and externally, for a virtual world, which culminated 
in the creation of User Connect. You can read more about our 
User Connect virtual event series on page 38.   

Our commitment  
to innovation
In FY20, we invested $68.1 million in R&D to improve our 
SaaS offering with new technologies, concepts and ideas 
enhancements and innovations. 

Our Software as a Service runs one global code line, allowing 
us to continuously deliver new innovations to our customers, 
who benefit from the scale of our investment as an enterprise 
vendor. With each new customer, our solution is enriched with 
new IP that powers the evolution of our software.

The economies of scale offered by our global SaaS ERP 
solution mean that when a customer signs up to our service, 
they receive far more than what they pay for. Each customer 
benefits from the hundreds of millions of dollars that we have 
invested to date and our commitment to continued investment. 
We take care of patching and upgrades, and  
offer two major software releases per year. 

Our SaaS offering is massively scalable, resilient and  
fault-tolerant. All our customers run the same code-line  
globally, and all processing resources are shared. When  
we make an improvement to the service we automatically  
roll out that improvement to all our customers. 

It is a testament to the collective skill of our people and 
organisational structure that we have achieved such a 
competitive advantage and level of differentiation in the  
SaaS market. 

Insights—our SaaS monitoring platform—gives us 
unprecedented visibility of the real-time performance and 
reliability of our SaaS environments and software. This enables 
us to analyse, detect and respond to issues faster than ever 
before. Insights also strengthens our support processes by 
connecting our development teams directly with customers.

24

Most trusted  
SaaS ERP  
provider

2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report“

The transformation of our data 
into a single source of truth for the 
entire student journey will improve 
the student experience and the 
management of student pathways 
from vocational education through to 
higher education.

Naomi Dempsey
Acting Deputy Provost 
Academic & Students 
Victoria University

”

539 customers have chosen 
TechnologyOne SaaS to power their 
organisations. This is an increase of 
more than 24 per cent in customer 
numbers over the past 12 months, 
and we expect this rapid growth to 
continue in 2021. 

TechnologyOne University
TechnologyOne University is the learning and training hub 
for our software. Through the power of SaaS, all of our 
customers can receive self-paced learning and comprehensive 
training on any device, anywhere, at any time. Our Learning 
and Development team is constantly adding content to the 
University’s offering, which now includes more than 90 hours 
of high-quality video material. 

An innovative digital learning solution, TechnologyOne 
University gives our customers a dynamic, real-time and  
up-to-date self-service support and education option that 
empowers users at all levels.

Most trusted SaaS  
ERP provider
We take the privacy and security of our customers’ data very 
seriously and weave this consideration into the fabric of 
everything we do. We are committed to building the world’s 
most trusted SaaS for enterprise software and will continue 
to make significant investments to that end. That’s why, since 
2017, we have achieved the highest level security accreditation 
of any SaaS ERP vendor operating in Australia. 

The foundation of our global SaaS ERP solution is a class-
leading security and compliance program designed to give 
our customers the strongest protection and privacy. As part of 
this program we develop and maintain our security framework, 
which passes the most stringent external verification, testing 
and scrutiny.

We have held ISO 9001 accreditation continuously for 26 
years. Our SaaS solution is accredited and certified for the 
following international standards:  

 • ISO/IEC 27001 

 • ISO/IEC 27017 

 • ISO/IEC 27018 

 • ISAE 3402 SOC 1 

 • SSAE 18 SOC 1  (USA)

 • AT-C 205 SOC 2 

 • Cyber Essentials Plus (UK)

 • Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) 

(USA)

 • IRAP ‘PROTECTED’

In the UK and European Union, we are certified with Cyber 
Essentials and comply with the General Data Protection 
Regulation (GDPR). 

In FY20, we enhanced our offering by successfully completing 
the Information Security Registered Assessors Program (IRAP) 
assessment for PROTECTED classified data, providing our 
SaaS customers with greater certainty in a constantly evolving 
cyber security landscape.

As part of our service, customers receive the benefit of 
these certifications, along with ongoing security and privacy 
enhancements, at no extra charge.

26 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

27

Transforming business, making life simple05
05
Our
Our
strategy
strategy

28

29

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleOur vision

Transforming business,  
making life simple
Our vision is to build and deliver truly great products and 
services that transform business and make life simple for our 
customers. Our core beliefs allow us to deliver on our vision.

Over more than three decades, 
TechnologyOne’s clear vision, our  
beliefs, our supporting initiatives  
and our continuing growth have 
underpinned our success.

At TechnologyOne, we know that our customers’ 
experiences define our success. We believe in leadership, 
not management. We know that our survival depends on 
our ability to set ambitious goals, and to lead and inspire 
our people to achieve great things. As a large, successful 
company, we also believe it is important to give back to the 
community. To pay our success forward, we established the 
TechnologyOne Foundation. 

Our beliefs, dedication to customer experience, leadership 
model and charitable ethos have formed our vision. This is  
the TechnologyOne Way, which we developed more than  
30 years ago and continues to define the way we operate. 

Our core 
beliefs

We believe in:

 • An enterprise solution 

 • Deepest functionality for the markets we serve

 • The Power of One

 • The power of evolution

 • Simplicity, not complexity

Our enterprise solution
We believe in the power of a single, integrated ERP  
solution built on a modern platform with a consistent  
look and feel and user experience.

A best-in-class enterprise solution

Only through an enterprise solution can organisations 
embrace the future of SaaS and smart mobile devices  
and unlock the efficiencies they need across their  
entire organisation. We have spent more than 30 years  
and hundreds of millions of dollars to deliver on this 
enterprise-wide vision. Today, we deliver best-in-class 
products that come together as a total enterprise solution 
from a single vendor. 

In the SaaS world we have seen the proliferation of ‘best-of-
breed’ products. We are confident, just as we have seen in the 
past for on-premise customers, that we will see a move from 
best-of-breed products to enterprise software solutions in the 
cloud, given the significant benefits it will provide: one vendor, 
one user interface, one common technology architecture, 
and preconfigured integration across all products. As 
TechnologyOne is one of only a few enterprise SaaS vendors 
globally, this positions us for continuing strong growth.

Our leading-edge platform

Our comprehensive suite of fully integrated software products 
is designed to deliver the best possible experience for users. 

Our software solutions are underpinned by our state-of-the-art 
platform. The platform provides the core functionality, security 
and a consistent user interface for each of our products, and 
enables our customers to access their information anywhere, 
at any time and from any device. We continue to evolve our 
platform, ensuring our customers can easily adapt to changes 
in mobile devices, computing and user preferences.

Preconfigured 
enterprise software 
solutions reduce 
time, cost and risk

30 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

31

Transforming business, making life simpleThe power of a 
single, integrated 
enterprise solution

Deep functionality for the 
markets we serve
We have chosen to focus on six key markets: local 
government, government, education, health and community 
services, asset- and project-intensive industries, and 
corporates and financial services. With more than 30 years’ 
experience and over 1,200 large-scale enterprise customers 
we possess an expansive understanding of these sectors 
and provide the deepest functionality for the markets we 
serve. We continue to add more functionality to our products 
and preconfigured solutions for these markets, to streamline 
implementation and reduce customers’ time, cost and risk.

Preconfigured solutions

TechnologyOne’s integrated products form the building  
blocks from which our preconfigured, industry-specific 
solutions are developed.

Created in collaboration with hundreds of customers, the 
solutions cover 80 per cent of each sector’s requirements. 
This accelerates implementation, while leaving room for the 
software to be configured to customers’ specific needs.

This approach is faster, cheaper and safer than that adopted 
by our competitors.

Deep industry engagement

Each of our preconfigured solutions is developed by a team of 
specialists with an in-depth understanding of our key markets. 
We work closely with our sectors to stay abreast of current 
requirements, organisational and user challenges, legislation 
and emerging trends. This deep industry engagement ensures 
our preconfigured solutions continue to lead the market.

The Power of One
TechnologyOne’s hallmark is being one vendor with a 
single vision, code-line and experience. We do not use 
implementation partners or value-added resellers. We take 
complete responsibility for building, marketing, selling, 
implementing, supporting and running our enterprise solutions 
for each customer to guarantee long-term success.

Our unique value proposition

We are accountable to our customers, whether the focus 
is on business needs, underlying technology, delivering 
implementations on time and within budget, or excellence  
in support and customer service.

When organisations invest in our solutions they benefit from 
a direct relationship with us every step of the way. From the 
start, we take ownership of a project and provide outstanding 
service and support.

Unlike our competitors, we provide a single, integrated 
consulting capability to enable a safer, faster and more cost-
effective time to delivery for our industry solutions. We partner 
with our customers to ensure that they can truly unlock the 
value of their TechnologyOne investment. This is underpinned 
by the industry and product experience of our 300 consultants 
and the power of our Solutions Implementation Methodology 
(SIM) 2.0.

The power of evolution
Substantial investment into R&D each year allows us  
to provide our customers a strong, continuing competitive 
advantage through an enterprise solution that adapts  
and evolves by embracing new technologies, concepts  
and innovation.

In our 30+ years, being ahead of the technological curve has 
been part of our DNA, because we’ve invested in technology, 
processes and people, for our customers and the verticals we 
serve. We’re always innovating, so our customers can too.

Using technology for competitive advantage

One of our founding principles in 1987 was to use new and 
emerging technologies to provide a competitive advantage  
for our customers. It continues to be a major focus today.

For more than 30 years, we have successfully delivered a 
continuous and smooth technology transition that has seen 
TechnologyOne migrate our customers across a number 
of technology paradigms, from mainframe to client-server 
computing to the Internet, to our Connected Intelligence (Ci) 
platform and more recently, Ci Anywhere. Our SaaS Platform 
is built on beautiful design, and can be used by any business 
consumer, anywhere, on any device and at any time. It is 
powerful and simple to use, allowing our customers to realise 
the benefits of our global SaaS ERP solution on their smart 
mobile devices.

Simplicity, not complexity
As a leader in the ERP market, we have always focused on 
transforming business. More importantly, we do this to remove 
complexity and make life simple for our customers.

Simplicity is a philosophy we continue to embrace in 
everything we do for our customers. We want to be known  
for an ERP solution that is easy, simple and intuitive to use, 
and that removes needless complexity.

By embracing the simplicity of a SaaS model, we deliver our 
software in a high performing and secure manner. Our highly 
available infrastructure has redundancy built in at every level 
and ensures our customers don’t have to worry about running 
or updating their own software and infrastructure.

By removing the need to manage their computing 
environment, customers can focus on business,  
rather than the supporting technology.

32

Transforming business, making life simple

33

2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report06
06
Our  
Our  
growth
growth

34

35

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleGlobal SaaS ERP solution
Our ongoing success has been underpinned by the incredible 
growth of our SaaS business, which doubles in size every 18 
months. This is powering the growth of TechnologyOne, which 
continues to double in size every five years.

We now have 539 customers on our global SaaS  
ERP solution.

Our solution is a clear market leader because we are the only 
enterprise vendor to offer a true SaaS ERP solution across the 
entire enterprise.

Unlike many other software providers that use cloud hosting, 
we own, build and support our software. Because other 
providers handcraft each customer’s environment, they  
cannot offer similar shared benefits or economies of scale.

Expanding within  
our geographies
We have global locations across Australia, the United  
Kingdom (UK), New Zealand, the South Pacific and Asia.

We have adapted our business to meet the differing needs of 
customers in each of these regions. In particular, we adapt our 
sales strategies for different regions as we identify new and 
ongoing customer needs.

We will continue to build on our success and consistent 
growth in Australia and New Zealand, while also capitalising 
on the strong growth of our SaaS solution in the UK. 
We continue to grow our market share in the UK’s local 
government and higher education sectors, and expect this  
will contribute significantly to our growth in the years to come.

Adding value to 
existing customers
We listen to our customers and make sure we understand 
their needs, meet their priorities and enable ongoing 
improvements in their business processes. Our goal is to  
build proven practices into our solutions and deliver the  
best software and services available for our customers.

Our Sales, Marketing and Customer Success teams keep 
customers informed about recent developments and the 
experiences of fellow TechnologyOne customers. This helps 
customers further improve their technology systems, business 
processes and models.

Building on this partnership approach, the TechnologyOne 
Customer Community has transformed our support 
experience.

As a dynamic group of TechnologyOne experts and 
customers, the Customer Community provides a world-class 
support experience to customers. It also enables them to 
influence product direction, keep up-to-date with industry 
news and collaborate with other customers.

Expanding our product  
range and depth
We are working closely with our customers to ensure we 
meet their ongoing business needs and provide an increasing 
range of functions within our enterprise solutions. The result is 
that we continue to extend our product offering by developing 
additional features and functions – further building on what 
is already one of the world’s most comprehensive enterprise 
software suites.

Expanding within our  
vertical markets
We operate within six large vertical markets and deliver 
preconfigured products to enable customers to quickly 
realise value from our solutions. This lets us specialise, while 
providing significant room to expand our customer base and 
grow our solution footprint as we add value for customers.

By re-engineering all our products, customers can enjoy  
the same software functionality across any device, anywhere, 
any time. Through DXP, we are extending the reach of our 
software from the back office power users such as the 
accountants, payroll clerks, student administration and 
customer service teams, to the front office end users such  
as employees, ratepayers and students, making the power  
of ERP available to everyone.

We have experienced continued success and expansion 
within each of our vertical markets. The adoption of our global 
SaaS ERP has also enabled us to penetrate our key vertical 
markets more deeply, by making it easier to reach customers 
that may not have been suitable for an on-premise solution.

Organisations that do not have the technical capability or 
resources to roll out our software on premise can easily 
implement our SaaS solution.

36 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

37

Transforming business, making life simpleA new way to stay connected

While we were unable to hold in-person events such as User Groups in 2020 due to COVID-19 
restrictions, this disruption provided us with the opportunity to rethink and reimagine how we 
engage with and educate our customers.

This led to the release of User Connect, our new virtual event series that connects customers 
to industry insights, endless possibilities to drive business transformation and new product 
innovations.

Launching in August 2020, we delivered more than 50 sessions across three separate tracks, 
available both live and on-demand. With more than 1,000 customers tuning in for the inaugural 
series, and over 3,000 sessions viewed, it was an overwhelming success.

We’ll continue to deliver our User Connect series twice-yearly, to ensure customers can stay 
connected with the TechnologyOne community and our latest insights, best practices and 
innovations. We’ll supplement with User Groups and Showcases once we’re able to resume 
physical events, to provide customers and prospects with an opportunity to meet with 
TechnologyOne experts and network with their peers in person.

Insights

Transformation

Innovation

38 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

Transforming business, making life simple

39

07
07
Our 
Our 
operations
operations

40

41

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleStuart 
MacDonald

Chief Operating Officer

We continued our SaaS evolution in FY20, this year finalising the 
unification and transformation of all our departments into a SaaS 
model. We realigned our organisational model to centralise the 
development of our products and solutions, continue the transition 
to SaaS and a high quality recurring revenue model, and empower 
our teams to be far more agile.

We continued our customer-first mindset, expanding our Customer 
Success team and delivering programs such as our Customer 
Reference Program, to improve customer experience.

The changes saw us become even more relevant to our 
customers and verticals, particularly during a challenging year 
where our customers were looking for partnerships that could 
help them navigate the uncertain path ahead. We continue to see 
success in this partnership model, with these changes supporting 
the growth of our SaaS customer base, new customers, and total 
product footprint within our existing customer base in FY21.

Together as One 
As the COVID-19 pandemic forced the world into lockdown,  
we realised many of our customers needed practical assistance 
during this uncertain time. In response, we launched our  
Together as One initiative to help them navigate their COVID-
related challenges. This saw our Consulting, Product, SaaS 
Platform, Support, Marketing and Sales teams come together  
to offer access to our software, SaaS Platform, services and 
shared knowledge.

This coordinated, multi-function response to support our 
customers in a time of need was a great demonstration of 
customer centricity and teamwork, and provided millions of 
dollars’ worth of support to our customers, including: 

 • 60 uptakes of our free Analytics Workforce Continuity 

dashboard

 • 350 attendees for our free remote training on critical  

business services

 • 280 new members joining our Customer Community  

to access shared knowledge from their peers

 • Support to expedite transitions to SaaS for our on-premise 

customers, to ensure their business continuity during 
COVID-19 disruption

Continued growth in the UK 
FY20 was a breakout year for TechnologyOne’s UK business, 
which saw the region deliver a breakeven result through an 
expanded portfolio of products in our key markets of local 
government and education. This year we signed nine new 
customers and completed 21 implementation projects, and 
continued to expand our footprint in Northern Ireland, with  
three new local councils added to our roster.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
While FY20 brought with it some challenges, it also 
validated our any time, any device, anywhere strategy. 
For customers at the beginning, or not yet on their digital 
transformation journey, the rapid changes brought on by 
COVID-19 has accelerated their appetite to move to SaaS 
and digitise their operations.

Our business model was positioned well to succeed and 
support our customers during this time, because we have 
spent years investing in the future and building strong 
partnerships with our customers through our vertical 
industry alignment.

As we move into FY21 we will continue to innovate to 
ensure we, and our customers, are prepared for the future. 
We will focus on driving the enhancement and success 
of our industry solutions, with our customers seeing 
the benefit of tighter alignment between our various 
departments, as a result of this year’s organisational model 
optimisation and continued customer focus.

42 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

Transforming business, making life simple

43

Paul  
Jobbins

Chief Financial Officer and 
Executive Vice President,  
Corporate Services

Stuart 
MacDonald

(Acting) Executive Vice President,  
Sales

The Corporate Services team supports the company through 
strategic business partnering by providing systems and 
processes that drive efficiency, and by managing our capital and 
cost base to ensure we optimise return on our investments.

In FY20, we focused on strengthening our resources, skills 
and systems to ensure we can support the business to achieve 
future growth and scalability, and are well structured to provide 
detailed forecasts, planning and analysis to support sensible 
business decisions and win new business.

After adopting AASB 15 and our transition to SaaS accounting 
last year, we made further advancements this year, implementing 
the AASB 16 Leases accounting standard.

Underpinning our business success
In FY20, we improved internal disciplines and worked closely with 
our customers and suppliers to ensure we could carefully manage 
our working capital and cashflow. This played a major role in 
contributing to the company’s strong results, despite the difficult 
economic environment.

The Corporate Services team also supported an increased focus 
on the UK business, delivering additional finance and legal 
business support to assist in achieving breakeven in FY20.

Other highlights throughout the year included further enhancing 
our quality management and risk frameworks, achieving a carbon 
neutral footprint and the adoption of our own new product, DXP 
Expenses. By acting as ‘customer zero’, the Finance team was 
able to test our product in real time and provide meaningful 
insights back to our New Engineering team, leading to an 
enhanced user experience for our customers.

Supporting our teams during COVID-19
Our IT team was instrumental in supporting the business in its 
transition to remote working in response to COVID-19. As a 
SaaS company, our business is underpinned by SaaS solutions, 
ensuring our employees can work on any device, anywhere, any 
time. As we didn’t need to worry about our systems, we instead 
focused on our people, and ensuring they were supported 
throughout the changes and able to be successful in their roles.

We invested significant effort last year in implementing a new 
unified communications platform across the group. This proved 
to be timely and ensured team members were already proficient 
in our new communications technology as they transitioned to 
remote working. This meant that our legal team, for example, 
could continue to support sales in closing new customer deals, 
regardless of where they were working from.

The Corporate Services team also worked with our landlords  
to negotiate commercial outcomes while we weren’t using  
our premises, which contributed to our cost controls during  
the pandemic.

Strategic priorities for FY21
In FY21, the Corporate Services team will continue to support the 
business to drive growth in sales to new and existing customers, 
while driving improvements in internal systems and processes. 
The implementation of a new revenue processing system will 
further support our transition to a recurring revenue model.

By partnering with the business, we will assist in the transition of 
customers to our SaaS platform as well as the adoption of more 
TechnologyOne products by our customers, and support winning 
new customers in the UK and APAC

In FY20 our main focus was to support our customers through the 
challenges they faced this year, and partner with them to continue 
driving their digital transformation agendas. This was spearheaded 
by our Together as One initiative, which empowered our Sales 
team to engage with customers and provide them with practical 
assistance during the COVID-19 pandemic.

 • Strategic deal with Australian Rail Track Corporation (Australia)

 • Expansion within Toowoomba Regional Council (QLD) 

 • Allity Aged Care (QLD)

 • Australian Research Council (Australia)

Despite the challenging year, we continued to grow in the  
key areas of our business:

 • Expansion within Central Queensland University (QLD)

 • Tasmanian Government (TAS)

 • SaaS transitions – we moved 104 customers to SaaS,  

 • The Hills Shire Council (NSW)

taking our total SaaS customers to 539

 • New customer logos

 • Product upsell

 • UK expansion - we delivered a breakeven result, signing nine 
new customers, including some key strategic deals in the local 
government market.

Key wins for FY20
Our SaaS sales continued to grow in FY20, with the benefits of 
SaaS amplified as many customers were forced to rapidly shift to a 
remote working environment. Our successful expansion in federal 
government continued, as did our strong foothold in the UK’s local 
government sector. Our key wins included:

 • Brisbane Airport Corporation SaaS transition (QLD)

Strategic priorities for FY21
In FY21, we will further invest in new tools and processes to drive 
the accuracy and efficiency of our sales model. In the UK, we will 
build on this year’s success by continuing to grow our customer 
base, while in Australia and New Zealand, we will focus on 
transitioning on-premise customers to SaaS and at the same  
time, expanding their product footprint.

Acknowledging that the path ahead still looks uncertain for 
many of our customers, we will continue to build on our strong 
partnerships with customers to ensure we can help them navigate 
through the challenges ahead and prepare for their new normal.

 • Department of Agriculture (Australia) 

 • Hawkes Bay Regional Council (NZ)

 • Mid & East Antrim Borough Council (UK)

 • Expansion within Victoria University (VIC)

44

45

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleBrock 
Douglas

Executive Vice President, 
Consulting

Anwen 
Robinson

Executive Vice President,  
United Kingdom

The TechnologyOne Consulting business has this year 
continued to see results from our transformation agenda,  
with profit on an upward trajectory and growth in our 
Application Managed Services (AMS) business.

In our AMS business we have been driving to create an ongoing 
relationship with our customers through annual contracts. The 
recurring revenue model for this Consulting stream enables 
us to get closer to our customers, and better understand both 
their business and customers. It also provides a stable cost 
base, predictability in our revenue stream and minimises risk. 
We plan to move more of our Consulting revenue to an Annual 
Recurring Revenue model, to drive the same benefits for both 
our customers and our business.

Driving compelling experiences and growth  
Our commitment to delivering a compelling experience has 
seen our customer satisfaction rate – measured through  
post-engagement surveys – climb.

The AMS program business grew by 31 per cent, with the 
recurring revenue from this stream contributing to 22 per cent 
of this year’s total Consulting revenue.

Our AMS business continues to be critical to enhancing product 
penetration among our customer base, with customers that 
leverage AMS having five more products on average than a 
customer without an AMS program. Customer satisfaction within 
our AMS program sits at a phenomenal 97 per cent, which 
speaks to a highly engaged customer group.

Supporting our customers   
This year we delivered 235 go lives (213 in FY19), a 10 per cent 
increase year-on-year, despite the challenges many customers 
faced in response to COVID-19.

Given the dispersed nature of our customer base, our 
Consulting team were already set up with the training, 
processes, technology and methodology to successfully deliver 
implementation projects remotely. The transition was seamless 
for both our people and our customers, which resulted in seven 
go lives in the first two weeks following our transition to remote 
working. We saw an additional six new customers join public 
training during the same timeframe.

The Consulting team also played a key role in the company’s 
Together as One initiative, which was launched in response 
to COVID-19 to support our customers through the challenges 
they were facing. Consulting contributed to this program by 
delivering critical business services, with over 600 customers 
registering in the first week. Our customer satisfaction rating 
with the training sessions was 95 per cent, demonstrating 
we provided the support our customers needed, when they 
needed it.

Empowering our people 
Our team members participated in more than 3,300 days of 
training in FY20, and we rolled out additional tools to support 
our consultants’ success, including automation functions 
and real-time visibility across the portfolio of projects. This 
combination of tools and training is supporting our employees 
to deliver more predictable, consistent and compelling 
customer experiences.

We implemented a career framework for all our Consulting team 
members in FY20, to assess the demonstrated capabilities 
of our people and empower team members to create their 
own development plans. Employee engagement climbed by a 
further 18 points, demonstrating the continued success of our 
transformation agenda.

Growth in the UK 
We focused on growth of our UK operations in FY20, with 21 
go lives delivered this year. We also appointed a UK Service 
Delivery Manager to increase our AMS presence in this market, 
foster new partnerships and deepen our relationships with 
existing customers.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
In FY21 we will continue to align our strategic priorities around 
our three pillars: 

 • Customer - Improving customer satisfaction and evolving our 

Solution Implementation Methodology 

 • People – Ensuring the wellbeing of our people, and 
supporting achievement and career development 

 • Discipline - Improving systemised tools, portfolio governance 

and project financial management

Despite the challenging year we faced in 2020, the UK business 
delivered a breakeven result through an expanded product 
portfolio in our key markets of local government and higher 
education, as planned.

COVID-19 has acted as a catalyst for change as many 
organisations struggled to quickly and securely accommodate 
mandated remote working, being hamstrung by old legacy 
technologies. The increasing cost of maintaining these systems 
with ever reducing budgets has also galvanised action.

The UK Government see use of digital technology as key 
to responding to ongoing business challenges and to 
underpinning recovery. In support of this, TechnologyOne 
this year signed on as the key partner of the UK Tech Cluster 
Group, supporting the UK public and higher education sectors 
to address issues impacting recovery in a post COVID-19 world. 
The Recovery Roadmap Report has received UK Government 
endorsement and support.

“Right now, our clear priority must be growth. Using tech 
to power us out of the recession, to drive productivity 
and create jobs in all parts of the industry, region by 
region, and indeed all parts of our economy.”

Rt Hon Oliver Dowden CBE MP 
Secretary of State for Digital, Culture,  
Media, and Sport

Accelerating digital  
In FY20, many existing customers accelerated their go lives and 
were able to join an increasing number of UK customers fully 
benefiting from SaaS ERP. Many endorsements supported the 
ease of reverting operations to remote SaaS working.

London School of Economics & Political Science’s Director of 
Finance, Mike Ferguson, for example, said moving to a SaaS 
platform prior to the impact of COVID-19 allowed the university 
to be more adaptable and resilient.

“We’ve been on a digital transformation journey for 
some time. But over these last few weeks the ability to 
get work done anywhere, any time - which only SaaS 
can deliver - has changed from being something that 
was just part of an overall strategy to a mission critical 
requirement and without it we simply could not have 
continued financial operations without significant risk.”

Mike Ferguson 
Director of Finance, London School  
of Economics & Political Science

Continuing growth momentum 
From March 2020, our own TechnologyOne UK team also 
reverted to 100% remote working. All departments adopted 
new working practices with no impact on productivity, ensuring 
our continued growth momentum. This will continue for the 
foreseeable future.

In FY20, sales exceeded expectations, with nine new customers 
signing contracts. These included five new councils - three 
in Northern Ireland and four full OneCouncil ERP solutions 
(including Financials and HR & Payroll), along with one new 
university.

The key route for procurement was through the UK 
Government’s G-Cloud framework, which contributed eight new 
customers. TechnologyOne UK was also successful in being 
appointed to the new G-Cloud 12 Government framework.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
Our focus as we move into the next financial year will be on 
finalising the regionalisation of our products in the UK.

As the uncertainty around the pandemic continues, 
TechnologyOne UK will continue to support customers to 
maintain business continuity, and focus on new sales into the 
local government market and higher education market.

We will also continue to raise our brand profile with strong 
positioning of the key benefits of our unique SaaS ERP solutions 
to our focus markets, taking advantage of the increased 
appetite for change.

46

47

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
Richard  
Nicol

Executive Vice President,  
Products

Jane 
Humphreys

Executive Vice President,  
People & Culture

This year we established our newly-formed Products division, 
which incorporates the R&D and Product Success teams and 
unites the various parts of the organisation responsible for the 
successful delivery of our products.

As our SaaS solution empowers anywhere, any time, any device 
access, our customers were also able to easily transition to 
remote working and innovate to meet the challenges ahead, 
without having to worry about the underlying technologies.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
In FY21 the Product team is focused on three key  
strategic priorities:  

1.  Deliver reliable, high-quality products that our customers  

love and are easy to implement

2. Deliver enterprise consistency and seamless integration 

between products

3. Deliver timely enhancements and features that improve  

the overall user experience of our software

The Products team is committed to creating software that our 
customers love using, and supporting the growth of our overall 
product footprint within our customer base.

We leverage customer feedback to drive product roadmap and 
strategy decisions, while keeping them informed about how 
their feedback is shaping our software. Across our two major 
software releases this year (2020A & 2020B), we successfully 
delivered more than 735 enhancements, with 77 per cent of 
these requested by our customers.

Adapting to a new normal  
TechnologyOne lives by a vision of any device, anywhere, any 
time. It has driven all our business decisions, including the 
development of our global SaaS ERP, as well as our shift to use 
only SaaS-based solutions to run our business.

During the COVID-19 pandemic, our product teams were 
able to easily transition to remote working and support our 
customers, while continuing to develop and deliver new product 
enhancements and features.

At TechnologyOne, we value our human capital and constantly 
explore ways to invest in and enable our people to be their 
best. We know that as our team members’ capabilities grow, our 
business, marketplace and shareholder success accelerates.

During FY20, we invested in building and maturing our People & 
Culture offering, to ensure our continued success. To deliver our 
ambitious goals, we focused on driving accountability, clarifying 
roles and responsibilities and optimising our team structure to 
enable us to continue People & Culture’s transformation from a 
tactical, operational model to a strategic partnership model.

Keeping our people safe during COVID-19 
When the COVID-19 situation escalated rapidly, our team 
swiftly and seamlessly transitioned to remote working, to keep 
ourselves, our families and our communities safe. Our people 
were provided with appropriate support and resources to help 
our customers navigate their business challenges.

TechnologyOne introduced our Mental Fitness program during 
FY20, recognising the critical role our mental health plays in 
engagement, productivity and broader wellbeing.

Career Framework 
We successfully piloted our career framework in Consulting, 
engaging team members at all levels of the business on their 
career paths to ensure they are clear on what’s required to 
progress, be it laterally, cross-functionally or through promotion.  

Team member advocacy 
Our eNPS survey measures team member advocacy and 
loyalty. Our survey has been enhanced during FY20 to 
include measures such as company confidence, enablement 
and customer focus. TechnologyOne has made progressive 
improvements in the company-wide score through targeted 
action planning and responsiveness to the feedback acquired 
through this tool.

Strategic priorities for FY21  
Our people are our greatest competitive advantage. 
Investment in their engagement, career paths and capability 
underpins TechnologyOne’s success, success realised through 
achievement of our growth strategies; transitioning more 
customers to SaaS, increasing our product footprint within 
existing customers, adding new customers and accelerating 
growth of the UK.

In the coming year, we will focus on building leadership 
capability to enable our leaders to drive a culture of 
accountability and achievement. We will continue to foster 
team engagement with reward and recognition initiatives, and 
focus on creating opportunities for spontaneous collisions and 
collaborations, particularly following the extended period of 
remote working.

During the next 12 months, we will cement our Talent and 
Succession Framework. This framework seeks to identify our 
critical talent and critical roles, develop our highest potential 
team members and invest in our future leaders. Strong bench 
depth will deliver TechnologyOne a resilient, high-flow talent 
pipeline, positioning us well to deliver our growth objectives.

48

49

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleDaniel 
Sultana

Executive Vice President,  
SaaS Platform

Our SaaS business has continued to mature in size and capability. 
In what has been an extraordinary year, the benefits of running 
TechnologyOne software on our SaaS Platform has never been 
more evident. In response to COVID-19, our users seamlessly 
moved to remote working and experienced the full benefits of 
the SaaS Platform. It proved to be the ultimate validation of our 
technology, processes and people. We are proud that during this 
unusual year, our customers were able to experience a stable, 
consistent experience, while an additional 104 customers adopted 
the platform in FY20.

Our strong investment and determination to be the most  
trusted SaaS Platform has again ensured we are global leaders  
in the areas of and compliance, cyber security performance  
and reliability.

Our ability to ensure precise capacity planning allows us to  
scale as required and provide high levels of stability to deliver  
an outstanding customer experience.

Highlights in FY20 
We were extremely proud to be the first ERP SaaS provider to 
achieve a successful IRAP PROTECTED assessment, as part of 
our ongoing commitment to enhancing the cyber security of 
our platform. This means we can now process and store federal 
government information rated up to PROTECTED. Further to this, 
our decision to embed this directly into our service offering at no 
additional cost to our customers is a demonstration of our ongoing 
commitment to continuous improvement and to raising our 
compliance and cyber security standards.

We also invested in new technologies such as a new high 
performing storage solution for our customers and we see 
margins continuing to improve in the coming years driven by  
the significant economies of scale from our single instance,  
multi-tenanted global SaaS ERP solution.

Our continued, ongoing investments in automation and innovation 
is the reason we can provide faster, more efficient SaaS transitions 
and ongoing services for our customers. This allowed us to 
continue adding customers to the platform during the pandemic, 
as well as speed up the availability of new features and functions.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
We will continue to invest in new technology platforms, drive 
efficiencies and innovate. This, coupled with an emphasis on 
increasing the number of customers on our SaaS Platform will 
drive higher Annual Recurring Revenue, increased margins and 
profitability.

We will also focus on leveraging the IRAP PROTECTED posture 
beyond our federal government customers to deliver the 
enhanced cyber security benefits to our entire customer base. We 
will continue to expand the security and compliance posture of our 
platform to reaffirm our position as the most trusted SaaS provider.

This year we established our New Engineering division, which 
is committed to delivering future products, capabilities and 
architectural evolution for TechnologyOne and our customers.

By separating New Engineering from the ongoing development 
of our existing products, we have built capacity for our team 
members to focus on new product innovations, without 
impacting or being inhibited by the day-to-day operational 
requirements of our existing product roadmaps. This enables 
the team to explore new innovations without commercial risk or 
impact to the delivery and ongoing enhancement of our existing 
product suite.

With all new products and functionalities delivered on our SaaS 
Platform, New Engineering aims to provide further compelling 
reasons for our existing on-premise customers to move to SaaS, 
while expanding their product footprint.  

New product innovations 
This year we continued the development of our first generation 
Digital Experience Platform (DXP) product, with DXP Expenses 
and DXP Meetings progressing through our early adopter 
program and into general release. This is an exciting milestone 
for TechnologyOne, with DXP Expenses marking the company’s 
first mass adoption product that leverages artificial intelligence.

We also developed enterprise data migration software, which 
incorporates the unique IP we have developed from developing 
and implementing our own products. It has allowed us to build 
expertise around how we do data migrations for an enterprise 
software implementation, and we have passed on the benefit of 
that expertise to customers in this new capability.

Brett  
Hooker

Executive Vice President,  
New Engineering

Navigating COVID-19 
Our team was well positioned to seamlessly pivot to remote 
working when the COVID-19 pandemic hit, as our development 
teams were already operating in a SaaS-based operating and 
development environment. This meant the team could work 
from wherever they were, without needing to install VPNs or set 
up additional infrastructure. As a result, we were able to focus 
our attention on the wellness of our people and ensuring that 
they were comfortable and supported to navigate the changes 
while still delivering our program of work.

Strategic priorities for FY21 
Underpinned by our power of evolution philosophy, we will 
continue to embrace the accelerating pace of change in our 
industries and explore new innovations that will drive our 
business forward.

Our key focus for FY21 will be the development of our next 
generation DXP offering. The challenges faced by many 
councils as a result of COVID-19 has acted as a catalyst to 
accelerate the development of our Local Government DXP, 
which aims to provide an engaging digital experience for  
their communities.

50

51

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple08
08
Our  
Our  
people
people

52

53

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleEmployer of choice 
Our people are a crucial source of our competitive advantage, 
and we purposefully invest in initiatives that support the 
recruitment, retention, development and progression of 
individual talent within our workforce.

As a nationally recognised Employer of Choice, 
TechnologyOne is committed to providing an environment 
in which our talented people can be innovative, creative and 
realise their full potential.

This year, TechnologyOne received more than 13,000 
recruitment applications, processed 62 promotions and 
facilitated eight international secondments, many of which 
were employee-initiated.

Extensive onboarding  
and training
TechnologyOne hires passionate, talented and innovative 
people who are inspired to think about the future.

Our comprehensive onboarding program provides the 
best possible start for our people in their careers at 
TechnologyOne. The TechnologyOne Learning team continues 
to support our commitment to developing our people and 
growing their careers by delivering training in leadership, 
technical and professional skills development.

We continue to evolve our orientation and onboarding 
solution to be market leading, aligned to our new operating 
model and provide our new starters the best possible start  
to life at TechnologyOne.

Graduate program
Our graduate and intern programs form the foundation of 
our talent pipeline into the future. Our graduate brand and 
experience is highly regarded by our peers, competitors 
and industry bodies alike. We received in excess of 3,000 
applications, highlighting the competitive and highly sought-
after nature of our program.

FY20 saw our award-winning graduate program expand 
beyond Research & Development (R&D), as we welcomed 
graduates from broader streams including Sales, Support 
& Enhance and SaaS. Our newest graduates work across 
TechnologyOne with the company’s most influential and 
skilled leaders, who provide them with valuable learning 
opportunities and experience.

TechnologyOne’s graduate program was recognised in 2020 
as one of the top 50 leading graduate programs in Australia 
by the Australian Association of Graduate Employers.

Our world-class R&D 
With a team of more than 400 developers, TechnologyOne 
runs one of the largest Australian-owned R&D centres for 
enterprise software. Each year about 20 per cent of our 
revenue is invested into our R&D program, which continues 
to produce leading-edge technology that will enable our 
customers to accelerate digital transformation, streamline  
their business and improve their experience.

In addition to our R&D centres in Brisbane and Perth, we have 
offshore R&D centres in Indonesia and Vietnam. This allows us 
to extend our capability and better support our customers and 
existing products.

Cultivating a culture  
of innovation 
The innovation and creativity of our team is key to  
our success.

Our developers are leaders in their field who challenge 
conventional thinking and go beyond the traditional realms  
of development methodology. Our state-of-the-art R&D centre 
and initiatives are designed to foster collaboration, creativity 
and innovations that provide the platform for our future 
growth. In recent years, we have also learnt extensively from 
how consumers use technology, and applied it to simplify our 
enterprise software.

Industry partnerships
We are committed to actively fostering a diverse and vibrant 
information and communications technology (ICT) industry.  
We want to create interest around this exciting time in 
Australia’s economy and ensure we are engaging early 
with Australia’s youngest and brightest minds in science, 
technology, engineering and maths (STEM) subjects.

As part of this commitment, we sponsor the Queensland 
University of Technology Dean’s Scholars Program and 
the University of Queensland’s School of Information 
Technology and Electrical Engineering (ITEE) ICT Excellence 
(Prentice) Scholars Program. Many of these students are later 
channelled into our award-winning internship program.

With a focus on diversity and building exceptional female 
talent pipelines, TechnologyOne partners with Women in 
Technology and Women in Digital to continue to build our 
brand recognition and employee value proposition to attract 
rising female stars to TechnologyOne. We also partner with 
the Australian Computer Society (ACS) Foundation to sponsor 
the national BiG Day In™ series, which is designed to inspire 
high school and university students to pursue careers in the 
IT industry.

We are an 
Employer  
of Choice

54 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

55

Transforming business, making life simpleEqual opportunity
TechnologyOne takes diversity and inclusion seriously. We 
advocate for equal opportunity for all and are committed 
to addressing the shortage of female technology workers 
in Australia. To help achieve this, we provide equal pay 
opportunities for men and women and have a zero-tolerance 
policy for discrimination and harassment of any kind.

Recruitment and promotion within TechnologyOne are 
based only on the relevant skills, experience, qualifications, 
aspirations, potential and aptitude of applicants.

Women make up 36 per cent of TechnologyOne’s workforce, 
which is high compared to other technology and software 
companies globally. However, we are committed to further 
increasing the representation of women by working with 
strategic partners to encourage more women to pursue  
STEM-based careers. In doing so, we play a leading role in 
growing a more diverse pipeline of future candidates to work 
in technical fields and at TechnologyOne.

Some key programs TechnologyOne supported this year 
included the Tech Girls Movement and the Queensland 
Women in Technology Awards.

Hack Days 
In FY20, TechnologyOne continued its investment in creating 
an innovative culture through company-wide Hack Days. 
These sessions encourage innovation, creativity and fun. They 
also give employees an opportunity to break down silos and 
participate in projects outside their normal day-to-day work.

Hack Days enable us to showcase some of our emerging 
leaders by giving our people the freedom to lead outside a 
traditional organisational structure. All parts of the business 
are encouraged to participate, regardless of which team or 
region they are in.

Some of the innovations that have come out of Hack Days 
have truly transformed the way we operate and have made 
our customers’ lives simpler.

In a true demonstration of the innovative spirit of Hack Day, 
our Hack Day team innovated to allow us to continue in 2020, 
despite the shift to a more dispersed and remote workforce 
following COVID-19. With many of our Hack Day initiatives 
already delivered virtually to ensure that all regions and global 
employees can participate, the shift to a more remote delivery 
was swift and seamless.

Teams participating in Hack Day leveraged our virtual 
communications platform to collaborate on their hacks and 
engage with pitch coaches, with the pitches livestreamed 
for all global employees at the conclusion of the event. 
Employees working remotely were sent care packages that 
included our traditional Hack Day T-shirt and other ‘innovation 
starters’, so they could enjoy the Hack Day experience from 
wherever they were working. 

Rewards and recognition
To maintain our achievement- oriented culture, we think it 
is important to recognise and reward top talent. The annual 
TechnologyOne MARVEL awards celebrate team members 
who go above and beyond and showcases ordinary people, 
doing extraordinary things.

MARVEL stands for Merit, Achievement, Recognition, Values, 
Excellence and Leadership. Categories for the MARVEL 
awards are centred around our key initiatives. These include: 

 • Leader of the Year

 • Compelling Customer Experience of the Year

 • Hack of the Year

 • Rookie of the Year

 • TechnologyOne Superheroes

Winners of the MARVELs receive company-wide recognition, 
and are inducted into TechnologyOne’s League of 
Extraordinary People.

Capability development
We remain focused on implementing innovative programs 
to attract, retain and develop a loyal, achievement-oriented, 
accountable workforce. This is critical to achieving our goal 
of transforming our customers’ businesses and making their 
working lives simple.

The TechnologyOne Learning team continues to deliver 
training programs to ensure we are providing our people  
with the right skills to further their careers and meet 
customers’ needs.

Employee engagement
At TechnologyOne, we value our employees’ right to have 
their say. This year, we conducted employee Net Promoter 
Score (eNPS) surveys, which provided a channel for our 
people to be heard. The results of these are used to influence 
ongoing enhancements to our initiatives and programs.

To ensure connection and communication across our global 
employees, we conducted regular virtual Town Hall meetings 
throughout the year. These enable our executive team to 
share company updates with all employees simultaneously,  
by connecting all people, regardless of where they are 
working from.

We also continued our investment in Hack Days to give 
employees the opportunity to collaborate across functional 
teams and work on projects that fall outside their normal  
day-to-day work. These Hack Days are key to driving our 
culture of innovation and creativity.

56 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

Transforming business, making life simple

57

Regional Days
In FY20, we continued our Regional Days for our Sales 
and Consulting teams to discuss our strategy and goals, 
strengthen relationships across regions, teams and projects, 
and to improve engagement across the whole organisation.

Wellness program
TechnologyOne has a wellness program aimed at encouraging 
our team members to get active in the community. However, 
due to social restrictions many community events were 
cancelled, so we provided team members with creative 
alternative options, such as yoga and strength building 
sessions, so they could keep moving in the comfort of their 
own home.

A wellness resource hub was also created during COVID-19 
isolation, so team members could access weekly wellness 
tips, support, videos and material aligned to our overall 
wellness model – Healthy Minds, Healthy Bodies, Healthy 
Spaces and Healthy Culture. We also delivered a number 
of engagement activities to keep up social connectiveness, 
including a cooking class, online bingo, competitions and 
virtual drinks on a Friday.

Our annual wellness week pivoted to become entirely virtual, 
offering daily prizes, virtual ergonomic assessments, financial 
support services and EAP awareness sessions.

Collaborative facilities  
and technology 
Our Hack Space is an extension of the R&D centre in 
our Brisbane headquarters. The project area provides a 
collaborative workspace for aspiring interns, graduates and 
employees to innovate and develop world-class software.

With technology and design being at the forefront of the 
concept, the Village Green social areas provide spaces in 
our offices to showcase the ongoing accomplishments and 
achievements of the company in an environment that reflects 
our products and values.

This year, the remote working conditions brought about by 
COVID-19 provided us with the opportunity to reimagine 
our traditional employee engagement events. Using a 
combination of state-of-the-art audio visual equipment, 
technology and collaboration tools, we connected our 
employees digitally across all regions for virtual Town Hall 
meetings, Hack Days, R&D Showcases and other global 
company-wide events.

Our corporate sustainability 
scheme
TechnologyOne is committed to managing our business 
operations in an environmentally responsible manner. Our 
headquarters in Brisbane’s Fortitude Valley has a Six Green 
Star environmental rating. The building includes numerous 
environmentally-rated sustainable development features, 
including 50 per cent more fresh air than standard commercial 
buildings, carbon dioxide monitoring, external views to 
maximise daylight, energy-efficient lighting, dedicated 
exhausts in photocopier areas, a gas-powered generator and 
a large rainwater collection area on the roof to supply water 
for the toilets and garden irrigation.

In FY20, we also achieved Climate Active Carbon Neutral 
certification. We offset our carbon footprint through the 
acquisition of certified carbon credits, which have been 
created through a wind power initiative in India that aims to 
develop enough power to replace existing coal-fired power 
plants. This makes TechnologyOne now one of only two 
companies in the Australian technology sector to make this 
investment and reach this achievement.

Our people are also encouraged to access and adhere to our 
Environment Policy. It outlines our commitment to providing an 
environmentally responsible workplace, and ways to engage 
in sound workplace practices through reducing waste and 
giving more consideration to the use of energy and resources.

For more information see our Corporate Sustainability Report 
overview on page 60.

58 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

59

Transforming business, making life simpleCorporate 
Sustainability 
overview

TechnologyOne’s  
approach to  
sustainability

Customer

People

Responsible 
business

Our community 
& environment

Customer retention99 %

•  Customer satisfaction and retention

•  Data privacy and security

36 %

Participation of women, placing  

us among the best globally in the 

IT industry

•  Talent attraction and retention

•  Workplace diversity and inclusion

•  Employee engagement and culture

•  Employee training and development

•  Employee health and wellbeing

e

1% ti m

Our people

R&D

F

e

e

d

b
a
c
k
m
e
c
h
a

nis
m
s

Our community 
& environment

Our products 
and solutions

Implementation 
& Support

Marketing/Sales

$

68.1 m

R&D investment for 2020 

(22% of revenue)

•  Ethics, values and transparency

• 

Innovation

•  Compliance

1

%

p

r

o

fi

t

Our customers

Profit

Revenue

PLEDGE

1%

•  $2m global impact in FY20

•  Community investment and education

•  Environmental footprint

Our growth

For the full Sustainability Report visit our website TechnologyOneCorp.com

60

61

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
Pledge 1%
The TechnologyOne Foundation is part of the Pledge 1% 
corporate philanthropy movement, which is dedicated to 
making the community a key stakeholder in every business. 
In committing to the Pledge 1% movement, individuals and 
companies donate 1% of their profit, product and employees’ 
time to their communities.

The TechnologyOne Foundation is dedicated to making 
a difference to underprivileged and at-risk youth in our 
communities by empowering them to transform their lives and 
create their own pathways to success. The Foundation was 
established in 2016 to ensure that charitable giving would 
become a long-term initiative for the business, and encourage 
philanthropy to become part of the company culture.

TechnologyOne donates 1% of annual profit to our charity 
partners. We partner with a number of key charities, including 
Opportunity International Australia, The School of St Jude, 
The Fred Hollows Foundation, SolarBuddy and The Salvation 
Army. This strategic approach to charitable giving enables us 
to make a bigger difference to the causes we support.

Through the 1% product, our commitment is to donate 1% 
of licence fee revenue each year. This makes it easier for 
not-for-profit organisations to access our solutions and take 
advantage of the efficiencies they provide, which in turn 
extends the impact of their work.

All TechnologyOne team members can also take up to 
2.5 days leave each year to volunteer during work hours 
for charitable organisations. This supports our 1% of time 
commitment. The Pledge 1% equated to a more than  
$2 million commitment by the company in FY20.

The year in summary
In FY20, the TechnologyOne Foundation’s work was 
recognised with two awards: Winner - The Australian  
Business Awards - Community Contribution; and  
Finalist - QCF Community Contribution Awards. We  
donated approximately $770,000 to our charity partners 
(Opportunity International Australia, The Salvation Army,  
The School of St Jude, SolarBuddy, The Prince’s Trust UK,  
The Fred Hollows Foundation, The Big Issue and The Smith 
Family).

This year, we also:

 • Finalised our commitment to a three-year partnership 
with The Fred Hollows Foundation to support the 
Vietnam Child Eye Care program, which aims to eradicate 
avoidable blindness in school-aged children. The 
Vietnamese Government will now fully fund the program 
into the future.

 • Raised funds for those affected by the devastating 
bushfires that swept across the eastern states, with 
employee contributions matched by the Foundation. 
In total, $27,250 went to charity partner The Salvation 
Army to help communities in the Scenic Rim impacted by 
drought and then fire with ongoing physical and mental 
recovery.

 • Financially supported 34 disadvantaged students, all 

who identify as Indigenous, through the Learning for Life 
program with The Smith Family. Staff also packed 900 
stationary kits to be distributed to students.

 • Assisted more than 30 charities through our volunteering 

hours and donations.

 • Provided game-changing new software for the School of 

St Jude, which was delivered entirely remotely

 • Provided over $50,000 worth of product discounts to  
not-for-profit customers as part of our 1% profit pledge.

 • Through company-wide volunteering, supported 1,625 
SolarBuddy lights being assembled and delivered to 
children in Vanuatu living in energy poverty. With access 
to these lights, students are studying 78% longer.

 • Contributed 123 volunteer hours for The Big Issue, across 
vendor breakfasts, a community street soccer program 
and The Big Issue challenges.

 • Sent our IT waste to a local social enterprise initiative, 

Substation 33, which assists disadvantaged youth to gain 
confidence and skills for the transition to sustainable 
employment, through the recycling of electronic waste.

In addition to our major charity partners, the Foundation 
supported a number of other worthy causes including: The 
Prince’s Trust UK, Plan International, Drug ARM, Evolve 
Housing, St Vincent de Paul and KemBali School  
in Indonesia.

62 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

63

Transforming business, making life simpleOur work with Opportunity 
International Australia
Through our donations to and partnership with the 
microfinance group Opportunity International Australia,  
we are transforming communities and helping families.  
We aim to help 500,000 children and their families over  
the 15-year period.

As a result of this partnership, families in India can access 
small loans to enable them to build businesses. This will also 
help them to earn regular incomes to support themselves, as 
well as feed, clothe and educate their children.

With funds for initiatives such as starting a shop or buying 
seeds for a vegetable farm, families can transform their lives 
and their children’s futures. Further, because 98 per cent of 
the small loans are repaid and recycled, the impact creates 
a positive ripple effect in their communities as more jobs are 
created. Those jobs might include delivering goods or helping 
with sewing and weaving orders.

Boosting local communities 
With more income and therefore more money to spend on 
items such as food and transport, families who used to live  
in poverty become active participants in their local economies. 
This benefits the providers of those products and services, 
who are themselves often entrepreneurs.

This virtuous cycle ensures that microfinance provides a  
long-term boost to economies and helps to develop self-
sustaining communities more so than one-time handouts.

Creating change 
Micro-entrepreneurs are also able to use their influence to 
bring about positive changes in their communities. With the 
confidence that comes with having their own businesses, 
people can begin to seek better infrastructure or educational 
facilities from government, or bring local families together to 
take on community projects.

Our goal is to 
Our goal is to 
help 500,000 
help 500,000 
children out of 
children out of 
poverty by 2032
poverty by 2032

64 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report
64 2020 TechnologyOne Annual Report

© Michael Amendolia

65

Transforming business, making life simple06
06
Financial 
Financial 
statements
statements

66

67

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleDirectors’  
report

Experience and expertise

Mr Di Marco founded TechnologyOne in 1987, after extensive experience in the software 
industry in the area of large-scale fixed time and fixed price software development. Mr Di 
Marco has over 35 years’ experience in the software industry. He has been responsible for all 
operational aspects of TechnologyOne, as well as the strategic direction of the company.

Mr Di Marco has played a major role in promoting the Australian IT industry and is a past 
director of the Australian Information Industry Association, the industry’s peak body. He has 
been a director of a number of IT companies. He has also been actively involved in charitable 
organisations and is a past director of the Royal Children’s Hospital Foundation Board. He 
is a member of the Australian Institute of Company Directors and a Fellow of the Australian 
Computer Society. Mr Di Marco has received extensive recognition for his contribution and 
pioneering work for the IT industry. He remains a major shareholder of TechnologyOne.

Mr Di Marco is the Executive Chairman of TechnologyOne, and Chief Strategy and Innovation 
Officer for the company. He continues to work with the Executive team and Board. He continues 
to focus on strategy, innovation and creativity to ensure the company continues to build future 

platforms for strong growth.

Special Responsibilities

Chairman of the Board and Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer.

Interests in shares and options

20,372,500 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held beneficially through Masterbah  
Pty Ltd. 6,000 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held on behalf of family members.  
In addition, a relationship deed exists between Masterbah Pty Ltd and JL Mactaggart  
Holdings Pty Ltd (founding shareholders) – Masterbah Pty Ltd exercises voting rights only  
in respect of 30,872,500 securities and an escrow arrangement applies to 14,000,000 of  
those securities. There are no other beneficial rights incumbent on these shares other than 
voting rights.

Experience and expertise 

Mr McLean has more than 40 years’ experience in the enterprise software industry including 
holding Senior Executive and Managing Director roles in several international and Australian 
software companies. His involvement in the enterprise software industry has included leading 
and managing software development, consulting and sales and marketing teams.

Mr McLean joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director in 1992, was appointed as the General 
Manager in 1994, Chief Operating Officer in 1999 and was promoted to Chief Executive Officer 
of Operations in 2003.

Mr McLean retired from this role at TechnologyOne on 15 July 2004 and remains  
a Non-Executive Director.

Special Responsibilities

Member of the Remuneration Committee (from 1 June 2020). 

Interests in shares and options

69,737 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held beneficially through RONMAC 
Investments Pty Ltd.

Adrian  
Di Marco

B Sc, MAICD, FACS   
Appointed 8 December 1999

Ron McLean

Appointed 8 December 1999

Experience and expertise 

Mr Mactaggart’s experience spans industries such as agriculture, agri-tech, manufacturing and 
software. He is a co-founder of Brisbane Angels, and an active investor and mentor in a large 
number of entrepreneurial ventures. Mr Mactaggart played an integral role in the creation, 
funding, and development of TechnologyOne and remains a major shareholder. Mr Mactaggart 
has been a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Company Directors since 1991.

Interests in shares and options

30,872,500 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held beneficially through JL Mactaggart 
Holdings Pty Ltd. 30,000 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held via the Jontra trust.

Experience and expertise 

Mr Blinco is a former Director and Chair of Business Advisory accounting firm Moore Stephens 
Brisbane Ltd. He has over 30 years’ experience in the areas of business services and planning, 
investment strategies, management and financial advice. Mr Blinco is a Director of a number 
of unlisted companies. His expertise is broadly respected and acknowledged throughout the 
business community. He is a Fellow of the Institute of Chartered Accountants and a Member of 
the Australian Institute of Company Directors.

Special Responsibilities

Member of the Audit and Risk Committee.

Interests in shares and options

200,000 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held beneficially through Autun Pty Ltd 
ATF Blinco Accumulation Superannuation Fund.

John 
Mactaggart

FAICD  |  Appointed 8 December 1999

Kevin Blinco

B Bus, FCA  |  Appointed 1 April 2004

68

69

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleRichard Anstey

FAICD, FAIM  |  Appointed 2 December 2005

Experience and expertise 

Mr Anstey's career has spanned over 40 years. His first company, Tangent Group Pty Ltd, 
established a strong reputation for the development of software products and strategic 
management consultancy for the banking and finance sector.

With the sale of Tangent, he then co-founded lnQbator/iQFunds in 2000, an early stage 
investment group focused upon the technology, telecommunications and life sciences sectors.

Through iQFunds and personally, Richard has co-invested in more than 30 companies with 
the support of Commonwealth and State Government programs, Venture Capital Funds 
and both corporate and personal investors. Whilst being an active Non-Executive Director 
of his investments, Richard adds value to his companies wherever appropriate to maximise 
shareholder value and he has also been actively involved in the trade sale of seven companies 
to organisations in the US, Europe and Australia.

Mr Anstey is a Board member at the Queensland AI Hub and at the QUT Entrepreneurship 
within the Queensland University of Technology, a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Company 
Directors and a Fellow of the Australian Institute of Management. Mr Anstey now continues his 
career in venture capital and corporate advisory roles through iQ360 Pty Ltd.

Special Responsibilities

Chair of the Nomination and Governance Committee.

Interests in shares and options

25,500 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited held beneficially through the Anstey  
super fund.

Experience and expertise 

Dr Jane Andrews joined the Board in 2016, bringing more than 15 years’ leadership experience 
in research and innovation-based organisations.

As a founder and investor in numerous innovative companies, Dr Andrews has extensive 
experience in corporate strategy, entrepreneurship, commercialisation, innovation, research 
and development.

Dr Andrews is a Graduate of the Australian Institute of Company Directors, holds a PhD in 
Life Sciences, a Bachelor of Science (First Class Honours) and a Graduate Diploma in Applied 
Finance and Investment.

Special Responsibilities

Chair of the Remuneration Committee (from 1 June 2020), member of Audit and Risk Committee 
and Nomination and Governance Committee. 

Sharon Doyle

B Laws (Hons), B IT (Dist), G Dip Bus Admin, 
GAICD  |  Appointed 28 February 2018

Jane Andrews

GAICD PhD  |  Appointed 22 February 2016

Interests in shares and options

30,600 ordinary shares held in Technology One Limited.

Clifford 
Rosenberg

B.Bus Sc (Hons), M.Sc (Hons)  |  Appointed 27 
February 2019

Experience and expertise 

Ms Doyle is the Executive Chair and majority owner of corporate advisory firm, InterFinancial 
Corporate Finance Limited. She has successfully navigated technology companies through 
the challenges of steep global growth curves, with a strong understanding of the dynamics in 
Software as a Service (SaaS).

Ms Doyle’s leadership of InterFinancial has seen her develop a core practice providing strategic 
advice for technology and other IP-rich, high-growth companies. She also has extensive 
international experience managing merger, acquisition and private equity processes across the 
technology industry.

Ms Doyle was previously Vice President at Mincom, one of Australia’s most successful 
enterprise software companies.

Ms Doyle is a Non-Executive Director at Auto & General. She holds a Bachelor of Laws (Hons) 
and Bachelor of Information Technology (Dist.) from the Queensland University of Technology, 
as well as a Graduate Diploma of Business Administration from the University of Queensland. 
She is a qualified member of the Australian Institute of Company Directors.

Special Responsibilities

Member of the Audit and Risk Committee and Nomination and Governance Committee  
(from 1 June 2020). 

Interests in shares and options

18,280 ordinary shares in Technology One Limited.

Experience and expertise 

Mr Rosenberg has more than 20 years’ experience leading change and innovation in 
technology and media companies. As the former Managing Director of LinkedIn for Australia, 
NZ and South-East Asia, Mr. Rosenberg started the Australian office in 2009 and oversaw 
the expansion of LinkedIn in Australia from 1 million members in 2009 to more than 8 million 
members in 2017. Previously, he was Managing Director at Yahoo! Australia and New Zealand, 
and prior to that role he was the founder and Managing Director of iTouch Australia NZ where 
he grew the Australian office to one of the largest mobile content and application providers in 
Australia.

Mr Rosenberg has more than seven years’ experience on the boards of publicly listed 
companies. His directorships include Nearmap (ASX: NEA), A2B Australia Limited (ASX:A2B), 
Bidcorp (JSE) and up until recently Afterpay Group (ASX: APT). Cliff was also a Non-Executive 
Director with Dimmi (online reservations company bought by Tripadvisor.com in May 2015). He 
holds a Bachelor of Business Science (Hons) from the University of Cape Town and a Masters of 
Science (Hons) from the Universitat Ben Gurion Ba-Negev.

Special Responsibilities

Member of Remuneration Committee

Interests in shares and options

27,533 ordinary shares held in Technology One Limited held beneficially through Clifro Pty Ltd 
ATF Cliffro Trust.

70

71

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simplePeter Ball

B Bus, CA  |  Appointed 2 March 2020

Experience and expertise 

Mr Ball is a Chartered Accountant who has enjoyed a long career in the professional services 
sector spanning nearly 40 years, initially in audit both nationally and internationally, with the 
last 30 years in management consulting. Mr Ball has been a Partner with KPMG for some 25 
years providing a range of professional services and advice to both public and private sector 
organisations. He has also held senior roles with KPMG including the national leader of KPMG's 
Strategic Planning and Economic Development service line and more recently as national 
partner responsible for the finance and operations for KPMG's Government Advisory Practice.

Most of Mr Ball's work involves providing strategic, economic, commercial and business 
improvement advice to enable organisations to make fully informed business decisions. During 
his management consulting career Mr Ball has worked across a number of industries including 
tourism and leisure, gaming and wagering, arts and sports, and state and local governments. 
He has been a lead adviser to government with respect to major projects and events including 
the Sydney 2000 and planned SEQ 2032 Olympics, Gold Coast Commonwealth Games, casino 
projects in all states and territories including Queensland's proposed Global Tourism Hubs. Mr 
Ball has also led international projects in the tourism and leisure sector. 

Mr Ball has an entrepreneurial spirit and has been involved with a number of start-ups across 
a range of sectors including property, education, gaming and the pharmaceutical sector. 
He is also actively involved in the community/not-for-profit sector having been a Director of 
Alzheimer's Queensland for the past 10 years.

Special Responsibilities

Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee.

Interests in shares and options

18,000 ordinary shares held in Technology One Limited held beneficially through the Noosa Hill 
Super Fund.

Company 
Secretaries

Stephen Kennedy

BBus, FGIA  |  Appointed 13 April 2017

Mr Kennedy was appointed Company Secretary on 13 April 2017 
and has been employed with TechnologyOne since January 2017.

Paul Jobbins

BBus (ACA), CA, GDipAppFin, MAppFin, GAICD   
Appointed 16 December 2019

Mr Jobbins is the TechnologyOne Chief Financial Officer and  
was appointed as Company Secretary on 16 December 2019. 

Meetings of Directors
The numbers of meetings of the Company's Board of Directors and 
of each Board Committee held during the year ended 30 September 
2020, and the numbers of meetings attended by each Director were:

Full meetings 
of Directors 
(Board)

Meetings of committees

Audit

Nomination

Remuneration

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

10

10

10

9(10)

10

10

10

10

-

-

-

5

-

5

5

-

5(5)

2(2)

-

-

-

2(2)

3

3

1(1)

-

-

-

1(1)

-

2(2)

-

3

-

3

-

Where a Director did not attend all meetings of the Board or relevant 
committee, the number of meetings for which the Director was eligible 
to attend is shown in brackets. In sections where there is a dash, the 
Director was not a member of that committee.

Principal activities
The principal activity of Technology One Limited (the Company) 
during the financial year was the development, marketing, sales, 
implementation and support of fully integrated enterprise business 
software solutions, including:

 •  Technology One Enterprise Asset Management

 • Technology One Financials

 • Technology One Human Resource and Payroll

 • Technology One Enterprise Budgeting

 • Technology One Supply Chain

 • Technology One Property and Rating

 • Technology One Student Management

 • Technology One Business Intelligence

 • Technology One Enterprise Content Management

 • Technology One Performance Planning

 • Technology One Spatial

 • Technology One Enterprise Cash Receipting

 • Technology One Stakeholder Management

 • Technology One Business Process Management

Dividends
Dividends paid to members during the financial year were  
as follows:

Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2019 of 
8.78 Cents (2018 - 6.16 Cents) per fully paid share paid in 
December 2019 (2018- December 2018)

60% franked (2018- 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

Special dividend for the year ended 30 September 2019 of 
0.00 Cents (2018 - 2.00 Cents) per fully paid share (2018- 
December 2018)

(2018- 75% franked) based on tax paid at 30%

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2020 of 
3.47 Cents (2019 - 3.15 Cents) per fully paid share paid in June 
2020 (2019- June 2019)

60% franked (2019- 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

2020 
 $’000

2019 
$’000

27,930

19,527

-

6,334

11,058

9,989

Total dividends paid

38,988

35,850

Review of operations
Please refer to Letter to Shareholders on page 10.

Significant changes in the state  
of affairs
There were no significant changes in the Company’s state of affairs 
during the financial year.

Matters subsequent to the end  
of the financial year
On 24 November 2020, the Directors of Technology One Limited 
declared a final dividend on ordinary shares in respect of the 2020 
financial year. The total amount of the dividend is $30,045,703 and is 
60% franked.

On 2 October 2020, the Federal Court issued a judgement against 
TechnologyOne in a civil employment case. As a result of the 
judgement, the Group’s provision was increased to $5.2m (2019: 
$1.6m) as at 30 September 2020. The company has retained very 
experienced counsel for an appeal to the Full Federal Court which was 
lodged on 27 October 2020.

No other matter or circumstance has occurred subsequent to period 
end that has significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the 
operations of the Company, the results of those operations or the 
state of affairs of the Company or economic entity in subsequent 
financial years.

Likely developments
Refer to the Letter to Shareholders.

72

73

Transforming business, making life simple2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportShare options

Unissued shares

As at the date of this report, there were 5,562,106 unissued ordinary 
shares under options (5,679,385 at the reporting date). Refer to note 
31 for further details of the options outstanding.

Option holders do not have any right, by virtue of the option, to 
participate in any share issue of the company.

Shares issued on the exercise of options

During the year, employees and Executives have exercised options 
to acquire 1,458,949 fully paid ordinary shares in Technology One 
Limited at a weighted average exercise price of $3.60. Refer to note 31 
for further details of the options exercised during the year.

This report is made in accordance with a resolution of Directors.

Adrian Di Marco
Executive Chairman

Brisbane
24 November 2020

Indemnification and insurance  
of officers
Insurance and indemnity arrangements concerning officers of the 
Company were renewed or continued during the year ended 30 
September 2020.

An indemnity agreement has been entered into between 
TechnologyOne and each of the Directors of the Company named 
earlier in this report and with each full-time Executive officer and 
secretary of the Company. Under the agreement, the Company has 
indemnified those officers against any claim or for any expenses or 
costs which may arise as a result of work performed in their respective 
capacities.

TechnologyOne paid an insurance premium in respect of a contract 
insuring each of the Directors of the Company named earlier in 
this report and each full-time Executive officer and secretary of the 
Company, against all liabilities and expenses arising as a result of work 
performed in their respective capacities, to the extent permitted by 

law.

Non-audit services
Non-audit services provided by the Company’s auditor, Ernst & Young, 
in the current financial period and prior financial year included taxation 
advice and other advisory services.  The Directors are satisfied that 
the provision of non-audit services is compatible with the general 
standard of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations 
Act 2001.

During the year, the following fees were paid or payable for non-
audit services provided by the auditor of the Company and its related 

practices:

Ernst and Young:

2020 
$

2019 
$

Taxation advice and other advisory services

148,290

131,672

Total remuneration

148,290

131,672

Auditor’s independence declaration
A copy of the auditor's independence declaration as required under 
section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 is set out on page 137.

Rounding of amounts
The Company is of a kind referred to in Instrument 2016/191, issued 
by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, relating 
to the 'rounding off' of amounts in the Directors' report and financial 
report. Amounts in the Directors' report and financial report have 
been rounded off in accordance with that Class Order to the nearest 
thousand dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar.

Environmental regulation
Based on the recommendations of the Taskforce on Climate Related 
Financial Disclosures (TCFD), TechnologyOne has determined that 
there are no material climate related risks or other environmental 
risks likely to have a material impact on the Group.  There are also no 
particular or significant environmental regulations that apply to the 
Group.

Remuneration Report (Audited) 
Introduction from the Chair of the Remuneration Committee 

Remuneration framework changes 
in FY20
After consultation with proxy advisors, a review of our remuneration 
framework resulted in the following changes for FY20:

 • The EPS growth performance hurdle for share options issued 

from the FY20 year onwards has been changed from an annually 
tested metric to being tested at the end of the applicable three-
year performance period.

 • In prior years, the Group disclosed targets for performance 

hurdles for LTI grants retrospectively on vesting. To provide further 
transparency, we now disclose targets for performance hurdles for 
LTI grants once issued, as requested by proxy advisors.

 • There was a change in the weighting of LTI performance metrics, 
which were introduced in 2019.  There was a shift in weighting 
from 50% on EPS growth and 50% on relative TSR, to a weighting 
of 75% on EPS growth and 25% on relative TSR.

Proposed changes to the 
remuneration framework in FY21
TechnologyOne remains focused on delivering its growth promises 
and we believe that our current remuneration structure positions 
us well to continue providing our shareholders with strong returns, 
both in the short and long-term, as well as ensuring alignment 
across our Executive KMP. We will continue to have ongoing 
dialogue with proxy advisors and our shareholders to evolve our 
framework as well as its presentation in the remuneration report. 

Jane Andrews 
Chair, Remuneration Committee

Brisbane 
24 November 2020

Dear Shareholders,

On behalf of TechnologyOne’s Remuneration Committee (the 
Committee), I am pleased to present to you our Remuneration Report 
for the year ended 30 September 2020. The intention of this report 
is to provide you with information around the linkage between 
our strategic initiatives, remuneration principles and remuneration 
framework to give transparency over how they drive shareholder 
returns. 

The primary objective of the Committee is to ensure that we align 
Key Management Personnel (KMP) financial rewards with shareholder 
interests and our business strategy, whilst ensuring that we attract 
and retain exceptional Executives, Directors and Employees who are 
collectively responsible for delivering long-term profitable growth and 
substantial shareholder returns. Below provides a summary of:

 • Incentive outcomes and alignment to Company performance 

 • Remuneration framework changes during FY20

 • Proposed changes to the remuneration framework in FY21

Summary of incentive outcomes 
and alignment to Company 
performance
This report demonstrates a clear alignment between executive 
remuneration and shareholder value creation. 

In what was a challenging year as a result of COVID-19, the company 
delivered exceptional results with SaaS ARR growth of 32%, consulting 
profit growth of 38%, a breakeven result for the UK, underlying profit 
after tax growth of 13%, underlying profit before tax margin growth to 
29% and reported net profit after tax growth of 8%.

In summary:

 • Total Executive KMP remuneration for continuing executives 
employed across both periods, based on total remuneration 
packages offered, grew by 5%. This is below the Company’s 8% 
growth in net profit before tax.

 • Short Term Incentive (STI) outcomes across our Executive KMP 
came in below target. This is consistent with our growth in 
NPBT of 8%. STI outcomes are based on reported, rather than 
underlying NPBT. 

 • Our Long Term Incentive (LTI) plan resulted in 98% of ‘at risk’ LTI 
vesting for our Executive KMP. The Board set challenging LTI 
targets, which we believe assist in incentivising our KMP to drive 
superior performance and long-term shareholder wealth creation.

 • It should be noted that the Board exercised discretion in the 

achievement of LTI awards, given exceptional performance during 
difficult circumstances, which is discussed in detail in section 3.2.

iARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end

iiCash Flow Generation is Cash flow from operating activities less capitalised development costs. This is a non IFRS financial measure and is unaudited. 

74

75

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
Remuneration Report (Audited) 

The remuneration report contains the following sections.

1.  About this report

2. Key questions

Non-executive Directors

Dr Jane Andrews

Independent Director

3. Relationship between remuneration and Company performance

4. Executive remuneration at TechnologyOne

Sharon Doyle

Remuneration Committee Chair 
Audit and Risk Committee  
Nomination & Governance Committee

Independent Director 
Audit and Risk Committee 
Nomination & Governance Committee

Term

Full year

Full year

Full year

Clifford Rosenberg

Independent Director 
Remuneration Committee

Peter Ball

Independent Director 
Audit and Risk Committee Chair

Appointed 2 
March 2020

Executive Director

Adrian Di Marco

Executive KMP

Board Chair 
Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

Edward Chung

Chief Executive Officer

Stuart MacDonald

Chief Operating Officer

Paul Jobbins

Chief Financial Officer

Full year

Full year

Full year

Full year

5. How remuneration is structured

6. Remuneration governance

7.  Non-executive director fees

8. Service agreements for the Executive KMP

9. Statutory remuneration table

10. Additional statutory disclosures

1.  About this report

1.1 

Basis for preparation of FY20  
Remuneration Report

The information in this report has been prepared based on the 
requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 and applicable accounting 
standards.

The Remuneration Report is designed to provide shareholders with a 
clear and detailed understanding of TechnologyOne’s remuneration 
framework, and the link between our remuneration policies and 
Company performance.

The Remuneration Report details the remuneration framework for 
TechnologyOne’s Key Management Personnel (KMP). For the purpose 
of this report, KMP are defined as those persons having authority and 
responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the major activities 
of TechnologyOne, directly or indirectly, including any Director 
(whether Executive or otherwise). 

This report has been audited.

1.2 

People covered by the remuneration Report

The Remuneration Report discloses the remuneration arrangements 
and outcomes for those individuals who we have determined to meet 
the definition of KMP under AASB 124 Related Party Disclosures. The 
below table summarises each KMP, their position and term as KMP.

The table below shows all the personnel covered by the Remuneration 
Report.

Non-executive Directors

Ron McLean

Deputy Board Chair 
Independent Director  
Remuneration Committee

John Mactaggart

Non-independent Director

Kevin Blinco

Richard Anstey

Independent Director 
Audit and Risk Committee

Independent Director 
Nomination & Governance Committee Chair

Term

Full year

Full year

Full year

Full year

76

2.  Key questions

Key questions

TechnologyOne approach

Why does our remuneration framework have such 
a high weighting towards variable remuneration?

Our Executive remuneration framework complies with common practice for ASX200 companies but has been adapted to meet the 
demands of the enterprise software market. Relative to our ASX-listed peers, our Executives receive:

• 

• 

• 

Relatively low fixed remuneration to enable a greater emphasis on performance

Relatively large at-risk short-term incentive (STI) portion aligning Executives to current year performance

Long-term incentives (LTI) linked to long-term strategy, targets, and shareholder wealth creation

The winning of new business, driving continued profit growth in the current year is the key to our long-term success, and it is for this reason 
our STI as a percentage of the total remuneration is significantly higher than our ASX-listed peers. At the same time, the fixed remuneration 
for our Executives is comparatively low compared to our ASX-listed peers. The significant weighting towards the STI encourages our 
Executives to drive new business and financial performance in the current year, which creates Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)1 for future 
years, and therefore long-term success and shareholder wealth.

TechnologyOne Executives are already exposed to the long-term outcomes of the business through a larger long-term incentive (LTI) 
component than our ASX-listed peers.

The talent pool in Australia for Executives with large scale enterprise software companies is highly competitive. Therefore, it is important to 
ensure that our remuneration framework is appropriately structured for the enterprise software market. We believe that our remuneration 
structure offers the necessary flexibility and incentive to ensure that we attract and retain talented Executives who understand the industry 
and, in turn, drive shareholder value.

Why have we replaced our LTI measures for KMP 
with EPS growth and Relative TSR?

In FY19, earnings per share (EPS) growth and relative total shareholder return (TSR) were introduced to replace historical LTI measures, 
which included net profit after tax (NPAT) growth.  The rationale for the selection of these two measures is as follows:

• 

• 

EPS growth: Ensures that our Executives are remunerated in line with growth in shareholder wealth over the long term. 

Relative TSR: Ensures that our Executives are remunerated in line with the Company’s performance relative to our peers over the long 
term. 

The introduction of these two new measures ensures we have LTI targets which are better aligned with our peers and are more directly 
aligned with increase in shareholder wealth. 

In FY20, we adjusted the balance between these two measures so that there is a 75% weighting towards EPS growth and 25% weighting 
on relative TSR.

The winning of new business, driving continued profit growth is the key to our long-term success. Having Executives focus solely on net 
profit before tax (NPBT) ensures there is clear line of sight for Executives and transparency for shareholders as to how STI awards are 
determined.  The simplification of our software also reduces the cost of consulting services which in turn increases our consulting margins, 
thereby increasing our NPBT and enhancing our competitive advantage.

Therefore, we consider the use of NPBT as the sole measure within our STI to be appropriate.

Is our STI plan sufficiently challenging with only 
one performance measure?

Why did we introduce a deferred retention bonus? A deferred retention bonus was introduced in FY19 where an amount equal to 25% of the STI earned in the year under review is retained 
for a period of two years and only paid out to the Executive if they remain in employment with the Company for the entire deferral period. 
This ensures that we retain high performing Executive KMP and is intended to help further drive long-term shareholder wealth.

The introduction of the deferral component also allows the company further opportunity to claw back amounts previously awarded to 
Executives, in the unlikely event that business outcomes differ materially from expected.

This incentive is considered to be a Long-Term Incentive. Refer to section 5.3.2.

1ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end

3.  Relationship between remuneration and Company performance

3.1 

TechnologyOne’s five-year performance

The below table sets out information showing the creation of shareholder wealth for the years ended 30 September 2016 to 30 September 2020. 

Actual profit before tax reported ($’000)

Total dividend including special (cps)

Earnings per share (basic)

Share price at start of period

Share price at end of period

Total Shareholder Return

Reported profit after tax growth %

Statutory accounting fair value remuneration growth % for continuing Executives2

Total remuneration package growth % for continuing Executives3

1Accounting for revenue for these periods remains under AASB 118. They were not restated in this table for AASB 15

20161

53,240

9.45

13.26

3.84

5.94

57%

16%

15%

15%

20171

58,019

10.18

14.20

5.94

5.02

(14%)

8%

-6%

-6%

20181

66,528

11.02

16.14

5.02

5.58

13%

15%

8%

8%

2019

76,389

11.93

18.43

5.58

7.18

31%

15%

14%

17%

2020

82,470

12.88

19.75

7.18

7.94

12%

8%

8%

5%

2 Based on statutory accounting fair value remuneration earned excluding any termination payments or partial periods for Executives employed for the full year across both 2019 and 2020. This allows for comparison on a like for 
like basis. A deferred retention bonus was introduced in FY19. The total value of the award is retained and will only be realised at the conclusion of the two-year period following the end of the financial year, on the condition that 
the Executive KMP remains employed for the entire deferral period. For accounting purposes, the expense in relation to this award is recognised over the total three-year deferral period. The value included for FY19 represents one 
third of the FY19 award value. The value included for FY20 includes one third of the FY19 award value plus one third of the FY20 award value. The growth year on year does not represent growth in remuneration offered or realised.

3 Total Executive KMP remuneration for continuing executives employed across both periods, based on total remuneration packages offered, grew by 5%. This is below the Group’s 8% growth in reported profit before tax.

77

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
As can be seen from the table above, the Executives’ remuneration 
framework has successfully driven performance and the creation 
of shareholder wealth over the longer term. In addition, it is evident 
that the Executives’ remuneration has been in alignment with overall 
Company performance. 

The graphs below set out information regarding TechnologyOne’s 
performance, earnings and movement in shareholder wealth over the 
past five financial years up to and including FY20. Note, figures for 
2018 and prior years represent reported results which have not been 
restated for changes in accounting policy or accounting standard.

The first graph below shows our average Executives’ STI has grown by 
10% which is below the Company’s Net Profit Before Tax (NPBT) profit 
growth of 12% over the last 5 years. 

Average STI vs. NPBT

'

)
s
0
0
0
$

(

I

T
S

.

g
v
A

$700

$600

$500

$400

$300

$200

$90

$80

$70

$60

$50

$40

$30

$20

$10

$461k

$395k

$445k

$568k

$621k

FY16

FY17

FY18

FY19

FY20

Average STI

NPBT

'

)
s
M
$

(

T
B
P
N

Average STI has grown by 10% which is at a slower rate than the 
12% growth in reported NPBT over the last 5 years

Our STI structure is working as it drives short-term performance, which 
in turn creates a strong long-term recurring revenue base. In the 
long-term, this creates continuing financial success and substantial 
shareholder wealth for Technology One.

The second graph below shows that the average Executives’ 
remuneration has been growing at less than the Company’s NPBT 
profit growth over the last 5 years. 

Average REM vs. NPBT

'

)
s
0
0
0
$

(

M
E
R

.

g
v
A

$1,600

$1,400

$1,200

$1,000

$800

$600

$400

$200

$936k

$1M

$1.1M

$1.2M

$1.3M

FY16

FY17

FY18

FY19

FY20

Average REM

NPBT

$90

$80

$70

$60

$50

$40

$30

$20

$10

'

)
s
M
$

(

T
B
P
N

Average total Executive remuneration has grown by 10% which is 
at a slower rate than 12% growth in reported NPBT over the last 
5 years.

NPBT has grown faster than our Executives’ remuneration which 
demonstrates how effective our remuneration structure is at driving 
long-term shareholder wealth.

3.2 

Board Discretion applied to LTIs

This section discusses the application of Board discretion under 
exceptional circumstances.

3.2.1 

FY20 NPAT and EPS growth LTI

The global pandemic which has occurred in FY20 has had an 
enormous impact on the economy and businesses.  Many businesses 
have struggled. 

LTI targets based on FY20 NPAT and EPS growth were set in FY18, 
FY19 and FY20.

When the LTI targets for FY20 NPAT growth of 10% to 15% was set in 
FY18, and FY20 EPS growth of 5% to 15% was set in FY19 and FY20, 
there was no consideration possible for a global pandemic.

In what was a challenging year as a result of COVID-19, the company 
delivered exceptional results with SaaS ARR growth of 32%, consulting 
profit of 38%, a breakeven result for the UK, underlying profit before 
tax of 13%, underlying profit before tax margin growth to 29% and 
reported profit after tax of 8%.

The Board has carefully considered the exceptional results delivered 
during the COVID-19 pandemic and applied Board discretion so that 
the Executives achieve 100% of the NPAT and EPS growth LTIs for all 
option tranches which include a FY20 annual test. 

The executives positively effected by this are Mr Edward Chung, Mr 
Stuart MacDonald and Mr Paul Jobbins. This discretion does not apply 
to Mr Di Marco.

Please refer to section 3.3 and 3.4 below for details on the LTI Test 
and where Board discretion has been applied.

3.2.2 

FY19 and FY20 Perpetual licence fee growth LTI

When the LTI target for Perpetual Licence Fee growth of 8% to 15% for 
FY19 and FY20 was set in FY18 there was no consideration given to 
the strategic shift we subsequently pursued away from Licence Fees 
to SaaS ARR growth. 

In recent years, we have undertaken a strategic shift in focus to SaaS 
ARR growth with a planned reduction in licence fees. This strategic 
shift was after the LTI target for licence fees was set. It would be unfair 
to penalise executives given the strategic shift from licence fees to 
SaaS ARR growth, which we asked them to deliver, and which they did 
deliver, with SaaS ARR growth of 32%. 

In FY19, licence fees recognised were down 38%1 ($25m), and FY20 
licence fees recognised were down 33% ($13m) as planned, as we 
pursued SaaS ARR growth of 40% in FY19, and 30% in FY20. The 
Board sees this strong growth in SaaS ARR as exceptionally strong 
performance, and in keeping with what we asked our Executives to 
deliver. 

The Board has carefully considered the exceptional results delivered 
in SaaS ARR growth in both FY19 and FY20 and applied Board 
discretion so that Executives have achieved 100% of the Perpetual 
Licence Fee Growth LTI for all options which include an FY19 and 
FY20 annual test for this LTI. 

The executive positively effected by this is Mr Stuart MacDonald. This 
discretion does not apply to Mr Di Marco, Mr Edward Chung or Mr Paul 
Jobbins.

Please refer to section 3.3 and 3.4 below for details on the LTI Test 
and where Board discretion has been applied.

1 Licence fee growth used for the performance metric test was based on the FY18 annual report.

3.3 

Options granted in FY18 which have no vested in FY20

During the year, Edward Chung and Stuart MacDonald completed a three-year performance period relating to the share options granted to them 
in FY18, becoming eligible to exercise options which have vested over that period. 

A summary of the targets set performance against each target and options which have vested and are available to be exercised has been set out 
below:

Edward Chung

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

                43,535 

FY18

NPAT growth

                43,535 

Annual

                43,535 

FY18

NPBT margin growth

                44,405 

3 year

FY18

Operating cash flow / 
NPAT ratio

                13,931 

Annual

                13,931 

                13,931 

                14,802 

FY18

Customer retention (APAC)

                14,802 

Annual

                14,802 

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion

LTIs vested

FY18

FY19

FY20

FY20

FY18

FY19

>15%¹

>15%¹

>15%¹

100bp²

>100%³

>100%³

FY20

>100%³

FY18

FY19

FY20

>99%⁴

>99%⁴

>99%⁴

15%

15%

8%

200bp

102%

76%

101%

>99%

>99%

100%

              43,535 

              43,535 

 Refer section 3.2.1 

              43,535 

              44,405 

              13,931 

                      -   

              13,931 

              14,802 

              14,802 

              14,802 

1Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 10% growth, at which 50% of options vest, up to the stretch target of 15% growth, at which 100% of options vest.

2Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 50 basis points growth, at which 50% of options vest, up to the stretch target of 100 basis points growth, at which 100% of options vest.  

3Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 95%, at which 50% of options vest, up to the stretch target of 100%, at which 100% of options vest.

4Represents target at which 100% of options vest. No options vest below the target of 99% customer retention. 

Stuart MacDonald

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

                37,183 

FY18

Perpetual license fee 
growth (APAC)

                37,183 

Annual

                37,183 

                61,972 

FY18

NPAT growth

                61,972 

Annual

FY18

Sales operating expense 
growth

                61,972 

                37,183 

                12,394 

3 year

FY18

Customer retention (APAC)

                12,394 

Annual

                12,394 

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion

LTIs vested

FY18

FY19

FY20

FY18

FY19

FY20

FY20

FY18

FY19

FY20

>15%¹

>15%¹

>15%¹

>15%²

>15%²

>15%²

<8%³

>99%⁴

>99%⁴

>99%⁴

15%

              37,183 

-38%

 Refer section 3.2.2 

              37,183 

-33%

 Refer section 3.2.2 

              37,183 

15%

15%

8%

5%

>99%

>99%

100%

              61,972 

              61,972 

 Refer section 3.2.1 

              61,972 

              37,183 

              12,394 

              12,394 

              12,394 

1Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 8% growth, at which 50% of options vest, up to the stretch target of 15% growth, at which 100% of options vest.

2Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 10% growth, at which 50% of options vest, up to the stretch target of 15% growth, at which 100% of options vest.

3Options vest linearly from the mid hurdle target of 9% expense growth, at which 50% of options vest, to the stretch target of 8% expense growth, at which 100% of options vest. 

4Represents target at which 100% of options vest. No options vest below target of 99% customer retention.

78

79

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
3.4 

Options/EPRs that have been granted in FY19 and FY20 and not yet vested

3.5 

Fair value of options granted in FY20

Edward Chung

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

Relative TSR

                  87,532 

3 year

FY19

EPS Growth

                  29,177 

Annual

                  29,177 

Annual

29,177

Annual

FY21

FY19

FY20

FY21

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14.2%

     27,718 

8%

Refer section 3.2.1

     29,177 

To be tested at the end of FY21

2020

Name

Edward Chung

Stuart MacDonald

Paul Jobbins

Number of options 
granted during the 
period¹

Fair value per options 
issued during the 
period²

Vesting date

Exercise price

Expiry Date Fair value of grant

264,639

                           2.63 

167,396

                           2.06 

146,516

                           2.43 

1/10/2022

1/10/2022

1/10/2022

7.39

7.39

7.39

1/10/2027

1/10/2027

1/10/2027

697,104

345,197

356,213

1LTIs are offered to Executive KMP as either options (with an exercise price) or EPRs (executive performance rights issued at market price

2The assessed fair value at grant date of options granted to the individuals is recognised equally over the period from grant date to vesting date. The amount is included in the remuneration tables above.  
As outlined in greater detail in note 1 (q) (iii) fair values at grant date are determined using a Black-Scholes pricing model.

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

The model inputs for options granted to Executives are as follows:

FY20

Relative TSR

EPS Growth

                  66,160 

3 year

                198,479 

3 year

FY22

FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

Stuart MacDonald

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

Relative TSR

                  23,443 

3 year

FY19

EPS Growth

                    7,814 

Annual

                    7,814 

Annual

                    7,814 

Annual

FY21

FY19

FY20

FY21

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14.2%

       7,423 

8%

Refer section 3.2.1

       7,814 

To be tested at the end of FY21

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

FY20

Relative TSR

EPS Growth

                  41,849 

3 year

                125,547 

3 year

FY22

FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

Paul Jobbins

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

Relative TSR

                107,728 

3 year

FY19

EPS Growth

                  35,909 

Annual

                  35,909 

Annual

                  35,909 

Annual

FY21

FY19

FY20

FY21

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14.2%

     34,114 

8%

Refer section 3.2.1

     35,909 

To be tested at the end of FY21

Grant year

Performance measure

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance  
measure achieved

Board discretion LTIs due to vest

FY20

Relative TSR

                  36,629 

3 year

EPS Growth

                109,887 

3 year

FY22

FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

Board discretion has been applied to result in full achievement of the current year portion of LTI tranches that are tied to net profit after tax and 
EPS growth performance hurdles. Refer section 3.2.1.

(a)  Options are granted for no consideration. Each tranche vests at the end of the three-year period,  

subject to meeting performance hurdles.

(b)  Dividend yield – 1.6%

(c)  Expected volatility – 30%

(d)  Risk-free interest rate – 0.66%-0.91%

(e)  Price of shares on grant date – $8.33-$9.16

(f) 

Fair value of options – $2.06-$2.63

Refer to section 10.1 for additional information on the outcome of equity plans.

The performance measures for LTI grants made in FY20 are presented below. The performance targets, set out below, are such that they are all 
considered to be challenging targets that, if met, will drive significant shareholder wealth creation.

Performance targets1

Performance period

Testing

Weighting (all KMP)

EPS growth

Relative TSR2

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

75%

25%

1 The performance targets to be achieved by the Executives are set out below:

Performance Metric

Growth <5%

5%<= Growth > 15%

Growth >= 15%

EPS growth

0% vest

50% vest at 5% growth with 
linear vesting (50% to 100%) 
up to 15% growth

100% vest

Performance Metric

Percentile < 50% >=50%  <75%

Percentile>= 75%

Relative TSR2

0% vest

50% vest at 50% relative TSR 
with linear vesting (50% to 
100%) up to 75% relative TSR

100% vest

2Relative TSR targets are determined with reference to our peer group. Our peer group is defined as those constituent companies making up the ASX All Technology Index (XTX).

Refer to section 10.1 for additional information on the outcome of equity plans.

80

81

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
4. 

4.1 

Executive remuneration at TechnologyOne

Our remuneration strategy and principles

At TechnologyOne, our remuneration strategy is aligned with our vision of “transforming business, making life simple”. The Board believes that 
in order to deliver on our vision and build long-term shareholder growth, TechnologyOne must have a remuneration framework that allows it to 
compete for talent both locally and globally in a highly competitive and fast-moving environment and against companies such as Oracle and SAP, 
as well as other Australian software companies.

The remuneration principles that underpin our remuneration strategy and framework are: 

 • Attract, retain and motivate skilled Directors and Executives in leadership positions

 • Provide remuneration which is appropriate and competitive both internally and against comparable companies (our peers)

 • Align Executives’ financial rewards with shareholder interests and our business strategy

 • Achieve outstanding shareholder wealth creation

 • Articulate clearly to Executives the direct link between individual and group performance, and individual financial reward

 • Reward superior performance, while managing risks

 • Provide flexibility to meet changing needs and emerging competitive market practices

 • Commitment to diversity, reflecting a fair and equitable remuneration framework

4.2 

Overview of remuneration framework

Fixed remuneration

Short-term incentive (STI)

Long-term incentive (LTI)

Nature

Base salary plus superannuation.

Paid in cash monthly with 20% retention until 
accounts are audited and finalised. Retention amount 
paid in cash 3 months after year end.

Options and performance rights are subject to 
meeting performance targets tested over three years.

A deferred retention bonus equal to 25% of the 
annual STI earned in the year under review is 
retained and paid at the conclusion of the two-year 
period following the end of the financial year, only 
if the Executive remains in employment with the 
Company.

Purpose

To provide a competitive salary based on market 
benchmarking from the Remuneration Committee.

Drives outstanding performance in the short-term 
which in turn translates to long-term shareholder 
wealth.

Creates a strong focus on long- term performance, 
with a strong alignment to long-term shareholder 
wealth creation.

Performance targets

N/A.

Percentage of agreed Net Profit Before Tax (NPBT) 
for the Group; or percentage of NPBT for the relevant 
business segment for the Executive.

Blended approach of performance targets, including:

•  Net Profit After Tax (NPAT) growth (for grants 

prior to FY19)

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Licence fee growth (for grants prior to FY19)

Sales operating expense growth (for grants prior 
to FY19)

R&D expense growth (for grants prior to FY19)

Relative TSR (for grants FY19 onwards)

EPS growth (for grants FY19 onwards).

Performance period

N/A.

Annual.

Three years for options.

Deferred retention bonus is calculated on the annual 
performance period and deferred for two years of 
service. The employee must remain employed with 
the company for the entire two-year deferral period.

Target remuneration mix
Target remuneration mix at the beginning of the contract for the CEO (Table 1), and other Executive KMP (Table 3) is represented below. Over time, 
the remuneration mix is expected to change due to a larger increase in STI relative to other remuneration components. The below represents the 
contracted remuneration mix for the CEO (Table 2) and demonstrates how remuneration mix has changed over time to FY20.

Table 1. Target CEO remuneration mix  
(start of contract target)

Table 2. CEO Remuneration mix FY20

33%

34%

32%

30%

33%

38%

Fixed

STI

LTI

Fixed

STI

LTI

The below represents the target contracted remuneration mix for other Executive KMP in FY20 and demonstrates how remuneration mix changes 
over time (Table 4). 

Table 3. Target Executive KMP remuneration mix  
(start of contract target)

Table 4. Executive KMP remuneration mix FY20

33%

34%

30%

32%

33%

38%

Fixed

STI

LTI

Fixed

STI

LTI

We have reported separately the remuneration mix for our Executive Chairman (Table 5). The Chairman was offered an LTI of $400,000 which he 
declined as he has in previous years. The Remuneration Committee recognises that Mr Di Marco’s total remuneration is substantially below that of 
comparable companies. The Remuneration Committee acknowledges that Mr Di Marco’s significant shareholding in TechnologyOne provides the 
benefits that the LTI aims to achieve.

Table 5. Target Executive Chairman remuneration mix

Table 6. Executive Chairman remuneration mix FY20

33%

34%

33%

Fixed

STI

LTI

0%

33%

67%

Fixed

STI

LTI

82

83

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple5.  How executive remuneration is structured

5.1 

Fixed remuneration

Fixed remuneration comprises base salary and superannuation.  Following the end of the financial year, to ensure our fixed remuneration remains 
competitive, we undertake benchmarking relative to our peers. 

Our peer group comprises companies within similar industries which are ASX listed and are used as a basis for benchmarking ourselves against 

internally. Based on the findings from the benchmarking, fixed remuneration was increased by 1% for FY20.

5.2 

Short-term incentive

Executives participate in an STI plan which is based on NPBT. Key features of the STI plan are detailed in the table below:

Feature 

Opportunity

Description

The value of the STI is based on a percentage of Net Profit Before Tax (NPBT) for the Group or percentage of NPBT for the relevant business segment for 
the Executive. The percentage of target NPBT is determined at the outset of the contract and remains fixed for the contract period for each Executive 
KMP. As the STI awarded is a percentage of NPBT, it is uncapped to encourage over-achievement and drive performance in the current year and the 
creation of long-term shareholder wealth. Given the expected growth in NPBT over time, the STI component of total remuneration typically grows in 
greater proportion to the fixed and LTI components which typically only increase by CPI on an annual basis. An illustrative example of how this works 
over time in practice has been presented below this table.

The STI is uncapped and has no floor applied, aligning Executives with shareholder expectations.

In transitioning to a SaaS company, the use of NPBT as the sole basis for calculating our STI becomes even more relevant to driving long term 
shareholder wealth. This is because NPBT growth in a SaaS company translates to growth in annual recurring revenue (ARR)1 which results in 
guaranteed returns for the business in the future. Therefore, although the KMP are rewarded in the short term for increases in profitability, the Company 
and shareholders continue to reap the benefits of that increase in profitability for the foreseeable future.  

Worked example

Consider a candidate who can command a remuneration package of $900,000 in the open market. The TechnologyOne method  
is as follows:

Fixed remuneration

$300,000 (or 33% of the package with adjustments in future years)

LTI component

STI target

$300,000 (or 33% of the package with adjustments in future years)

Commences at 75% to 100% of fixed remuneration (as established during contract negotiations).

$300,000 is used as the initial STI target. If we assume that NPBT of the Group is to be used and the forecast NPBT is $40m (a 15% increase on the prior 
year) then contract STI will be $300,000/$40m (or 0.75% of profit)

Increase in profit

12% per annum

CPI

STI target as a % of NPAT

1%

15%

Year

1

2

3

Fixed

Profit target ($m)

Actual profit ($m)

300,000

303,000

306,030

40.00

44.80

50.18

38.96

43.63

48.87

STI target(STI % x profit 
target ($))

Actual STI (STI% x actual 
profit ($))

300,000

336,000

376,320

292,200

327,225

366,525

STI%

0.75%

0.75%

0.75%

Award vehicle

Cash

5.3 

Long-term incentives (LTI)

Performance measures

The STI target is based on NPBT for the Group or NPBT for the relevant business segment for the Executive. This effectively aligns the target incentive 
with shareholder return. 

Timing

STI cap

Clawback

Termination

TechnologyOne’s use of STIs differs from most other organisations in that it utilises only one performance measure (percentage of NPBT) in determining 
STI awards. This is to create focus and clarity for Executives whilst also providing transparency for shareholders as to how STI awards are determined. 
The Board and Remuneration Committee continue to monitor STI performance measures so as to ensure that they best align with the Company’s 
commitment to providing shareholder wealth. 

Because the fixed remuneration of an Executive is very low compared to our ASX-listed peers, to assist the Executives in meeting their short-term 
financial obligations, the STI is calculated and paid monthly with 20% retention.

20% retention of their STI is paid three months after TechnologyOne’s year end to ensure that the STI paid is based on audited and finalised accounts. In 
the unlikely event that business outcomes differ materially to what was expected, the Company can claw back any STI.

An important element of the success of our STI has been that it is uncapped so the greater the results in the current financial year, the greater the STI. 
This not only encourages over performance in the current financial year for the company, it has a dramatic flow on effect in future years through the 
greater recurring revenues for the Company. The uncapped STI also helps retain Executives over the long-term because the more they succeed, the 
more financial incentive there is to stay with us and continue to work hard to achieve it each year, and the greater benefit to our shareholders through 
an ever-increasing recurring revenue base.

Likewise, if an Executive under-performs in a year, there is a significant financial impact to them as their STI forms a significant portion of their total 
remuneration. Just as the STI is uncapped on the upside, it is also uncapped on the downside. Given that the Executive’s fixed remuneration % is 
significantly lower than our ASX-listed peers, under-performance has a significant, negative impact on their total remuneration. 

The STI framework aligns performance with remuneration outcomes encouraging over performance and penalising under performance.

The ability to clawback STIs exists in the unlikely event that business outcomes differ materially from expected. 

On termination, the Executive foregoes any further STI payments which would have otherwise been available for the remainder of the financial year 
under their STI plan.

TechnologyOne Executives have an STI set at the start of their contract which is typically approximately 33% of their total targeted 
remuneration. 

The best way to consider the mechanics of the TechnologyOne STI is by way of the following example. 

LTI remuneration for TechnologyOne Executives is made up of a share-based remuneration element (5.3.1) and a deferred retention bonus (5.3.2).

5.3.1 

Share based remuneration

TechnologyOne Executives are eligible to participate in an LTI plan. The LTI plan is designed to provide participants with the incentive to deliver 
substantial consistent growth in shareholder value:

Feature

Opportunity

Award vehicle

Performance period

Description

The value of the total number of LTIs issued each year (called a grant) to an Executive is typically set at 75% to 100% of fixed remuneration and is 
determined during contract negotiation when an Executive is hired but will ultimately depend on negotiations and the overall package components 
negotiated. 

Each LTI entitles the Executive the right to purchase one TechnologyOne share in the future at an agreed strike price, subject to meeting specified 
performance targets.

For LTI grants issued prior to the end of FY19, performance is measured over a three-year performance period with individual and Company 
targets tested annually or at the conclusion of the three-year performance period.  The performance period commences at grant date and extends 
for three years to give a vesting date.  For LTI grants issued during FY20 and onwards, performance is measured at the end of a three-year 
performance period only (i.e. no annually tested LTI measures). This is consistent with best practice and further aligns our LTI plan with the creation 
of long-term shareholder wealth.

The number of options in the grant are split into tranches based on the weighting of each performance measure. For performance measures with a 
three-year target, the relevant tranche vests at the end of the three-year period in accordance with the vesting schedule provided below. 

For performance measures with an annual target, 1/3 of the relevant tranche is tested in accordance with annual performance, however, the LTI will 
not vest until the end of the overall three-year performance period.

For accounting purposes, the expense is recognised in according with AASB 2 Share Based Payments over the three year period.

84

85

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleFeature

Description

Feature

Description

Performance measures for grants  
issued for FY18 and prior years

Grants made prior to FY19 are tested against the targets set at the time of grant. Those measures are outlined below:

Allocation methodology

The LTI is allocated based on the cost of the option which is accounted under AASB 2 Share Based Payments using the Black-Scholes model with a 
strike price being the volume weighted average price (VWAP) over the 10 days prior to the grant date with no discount.

Board discretion

In situations where the Vesting Conditions are not met due to factors beyond the control of the employee (eg global pandemic, trade restrictions, 
war, large-scale natural disasters), the Board has discretion to increase or decrease the number of LTIs vesting

The Board retains sole discretion to determine the amount and form of any award that may vest (if any) to prevent any unintended outcomes, or in 
the event of a corporate restructuring or capital event. 

The Board has the discretion to apply an Individual Performance Factor (IPF) to “top up” the number of vesting LTIs where a performance hurdle 
in a Vesting Condition has not been met for reasons outside of the employee’s control, or to take into consideration exceptional performance or 
contribution by an employee. The Board has the authority to increase the number of options vesting by up to 100% of the LTIs in the original grant. 
The total number of LTIs earned across all performance targets by an executive cannot exceed the total number of LTIs in a grant.

The Board has discretion to determine the extent to which LTIs vest based on the period elapsed and performance at the time of any change of 
control event.

Awards lapse unless the Board determines otherwise, in which case it considers performance of the individual over the relevant period up to the 
date of cessation of employment. 

At the end of the applicable performance period, any LTIs that have vested will expire 5 years after vesting.

We do not revise or re-test our LTIs over the relevant performance period.

Yes available

Directors and Executives are not permitted to use TechnologyOne securities as security for margin loans.

Change of control

Cessation of employment

Expiry

Re-testing

Clawback

Margin loans

5.3.2  Deferred retention bonus

Feature

Opportunity

Award vehicle

Cap

Opportunity

We introduced a new deferred retention bonus in the FY19 year. An amount equal to 25% of the annual STI earned in the year under review is 
retained and will only be released at the conclusion of the two year period following the end of financial year, on the condition that the Executive 
KMP remains employed with the Company for the entire deferral period.

Cash

For the same reasons outlined in section 5.2 for the STI, this deferred retention bonus is also uncapped.

Allocation methodology

The allocation of this LTI is based on linear recognition of the value over the performance period and service period.

LTI feature

Executive KMP and LTI weighting

Performance targets1,2

Performance 
period

Testing

Edward 
Chung

Stuart 
MacDonald

NPAT growth

Licence fee growth – APAC

Sales operating expense growth - APAC

Customer Retention by ASM Value - APAC

Customer Retention by ASM Value

Operating Cash Flow / NPAT

Company profit before tax margin growth

1Performance targets exclude acquisitions.

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

Annual3

Annual3

Annual3

Annual3

Annual3

Annual3

3 years4

50%

-

-

-

17%

16%

17%

50%

30%

10% 

10%

-

-

-

2The performance target has to be achieved for the Executive to meet their LTI target. These targets are set out below:

Performance metric

Performance target

NPAT growth

(i) If equal to or greater than 15%, 100% will vest 
(ii) If between 10% and 15%, 50% will vest at 10% and in linear increments to 15%, up to 100% 
vesting 
(iii) If below 10% growth, no options vest

License fee growth – APAC

(i) If equal to or greater than 15% 100% will vest 
(ii) If between 8% and 15%, 50% will vest in linear increments to 15%, up to 100% vesting 
(iii) If below 8% growth then no options vest

Sales operating expense growth – APAC

(i) If equal to or lesser than 8% 100% will vest 
(ii) If between 8% and 9%, 50% will vest in linear increments to 8%, up to 100% vesting 
(iii) If greater than 9% growth then no options vest

Customer retention by ASM value - APAC

(i) If equal to or greater than 99%, 100% will vest 
(ii) If less than 99%, 0% will vest

Customer retention by ASM value

(i) If equal to or greater than 99%, 100% will vest 
(ii) If less than 99%, 0% will vest

Operating cashflow/NPAT

(i) If equal to or greater than 100%, 100% will vest 
(ii) If between 95% and 100%, 50% will vest in linear increments to 100%, up to 100% vesting 
(iii) If below 95% growth then no options vest

Company profit before tax margin growth

(i) If equal to or greater than 100BP, 100% will vest 
(ii) If between 50BP and 100BP, 50% will vest at 10% and in linear increments to 100BP, up to 100% 
vesting 
(iii) If below 50% growth then no options vest

3The Company has chosen annual testing in circumstances, where long-term consistent year-on-year growth will drive greater shareholder returns. The performance 
targets are assessed on an annual basis with no LTIs vesting until the end of the three-year performance period. This ensures that the annually tested KPIs generate value 
for shareholders over time.

4The Company has chosen a three-year testing period where the average over a three-year performance period is used.

Under the prior LTI plan, it is acknowledged that the profit growth target, which made up 50% of each Executive’s LTI measure, was also the 
primary target for STI. The rationale for including the measure for both STI and LTI assessment is that the growth of licence fee in the short-term 
translates into long-term ARR growth. We further note that even though this LTI performance measure is tested annually over a three-year period, if 
targets are achieved the options will only vest and become available for exercise at the conclusion of that three-year performance period (subject 
to any Board discretion which may be applied, as noted below).

Vesting schedule

For each performance target there is a mid and stretch target. Mid hurdles have been calculated so that if they are achieved, this will create 
substantial shareholder wealth. 

Performance achieved

Meets the stretch hurdle

Between stretch and mid hurdle

Meets mid hurdle

Less than the mid hurdle

Level of vesting

100% vesting

vest linearly

50%

0%

The number of options that vest at the end of the relevant performance period is determined as follows: 

•  Number of LTIs earned per three-year performance target = Number of LTIs available for that target x percentage earned x individual 

performance factor1

•  Number of LTIs earned per yearly performance target = 1/3 x number of LTIs available for that target x percentage earned x individual 

performance factor1

1 The individual performance factor is typically 100%. The Board however has the discretion in exceptional circumstances to increase the individual performance factor 
above 100% to a maximum of 200% to take into consideration exceptional performance or contribution by an Executive.

86

87

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple5.4 

Detail of Executive remuneration and performance

Adrian Di Marco

Position

Executive Chairman and Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

Remuneration mix

FY20 Actual

$507,556

FY20 Target

$507,556

$1,052,397

$1,119,695

Fixed

STI

LTI

FY19 Actual

FY19 Target

$502,531

$502,531

$973,648

$975,373

Edward Chung

Position

Chief Executive Officer

Remuneration mix

FY20 Actual

$533,068

FY20 Target

$533,068

$674,824

$716,713

$563,556

$563,556

Fixed

STI

LTI

FY19 Actual

FY19 Target

$527,790

$527,791

$623,229

$454,744

$632,143

$490,734

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Directors’ fees

Superannuation

2020
$

2019 

$ Notes

513,058

507,978  

-

-

20,010

19,812  

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Chairman's fees

Superannuation

2020 
$

2019 

$ Notes

356,309

172,171 The base salary represents the amount earned for the role of Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

310,548 The Chairman's fees for the current year has been benchmarked in line with the Group's peers

131,237

20,010

19,812

Total fixed remuneration

533,068

527,790 The CEO's fixed remuneration has increased by only 1%.

Total fixed remuneration

507,556

502,531 The Executive Chairman’s fixed remuneration has increased by only 1%.

STI

1,052,397

973,648 The STI relates to the role of Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer.

LTI new scheme

Fair value of share options 
recognised

Fair value of share options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Fair value of deferred retention 
bonus recognised (refer section 
5.3.2)

Fair value of LTI recognised

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Total remuneration

1,559,953

1,476,179

% growth on prior year excluding LTI 
and termination benefits

% growth on prior year including LTI 
and termination benefits

Post-employment

Post-employment benefits

Termination benefits

6%

6%

-

-

10%

10% Total remuneration has grown by 6%, less than reported net profit after tax growth of 8%.

-

-

STI

LTI new scheme

Fair value of share options 
recognised

Fair value of share options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Fair value of deferred retention 
bonus recognised (refer section 
5.3.2)

674,824

623,229

339,328

229,828

-

-

-

(3,261)

-

-

108,171

51,936

FY19 amount includes one third of the FY19 award value. FY20 amount includes one third of 
the FY19 award plus one third of the FY20 award value. 
The growth shown does not represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

Fair value of LTI recognised

447,499

278,503

LTI old scheme

Fair value of share options 
recognised

116,057

176,241

Total remuneration

1,771,448

1,605,763

% growth on prior year excluding LTI 
and termination benefits

% growth on prior year including LTI 
and termination benefits

5%

10%

9%

Total remuneration, excluding LTI and termination benefits, has grown by 5%, less than 
reported net profit after tax growth of 8%.

15%

88

89

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
Stuart MacDonald

Position

Chief Operating Officer

Remuneration mix

FY20 Actual

$446,944

FY20 Target

$446,944

$461,130

$489,754

$378,629

$378,629

Fixed

STI

LTI

FY19 Actual

FY19 Target

$442,519

$442,519

$423,476

$325,142

$429,533

$384,689

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Director's fees

Superannuation

2020 
$

2019 

$ Notes

426,934

422,707

-

-

20,010

19,812

Total fixed remuneration

446,944

442,519 The COO's fixed remuneration has increased by only 1%.

STI

LTI new scheme

Fair value of share options 
recognised

Fair value of share options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Fair value of deferred retention 
bonus recognised (refer section 
5.3.2)

461,130

423,476

235,508

234,421

-

69,404

-

-

58,438

(3,007)

73,717

35,290

Fair value of LTI recognised

378,629

325,142

Total remuneration

1,286,703

1,191,137

FY19 amount includes one third of the FY19 award value. FY20 amount includes one third of 
the FY19 award plus one third of the FY20 award value. 
The growth shown does not represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

% growth on prior year excluding LTI 
and termination benefits

% growth on prior year including LTI 
and termination benefits

5%

8%

8%

Total remuneration, excluding LTI and termination benefits, has grown by 5%, less than 
reported net profit after tax growth of 8%.

18%  

Paul Jobbins

Position

Chief Financial Officer

Remuneration mix

FY20 Actual

FY20 Target

$247,250

$247,250

$296,750

$310,167

$220,185

$220,185

Fixed

STI

LTI

FY19 Actual

$206,250

$251,625

$94,940

FY19 Target

$206,250

$259,341

$96,519

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Director's fees

Superannuation

2020 
$

2019 

$ Notes

227,240

186,438

-

-

20,010

19,812

Total fixed remuneration

247,250

206,250

The increase from FY19 to FY20 reflects that FY19 was not a full year and that the CFO’s fixed 
remuneration was increased by 10% for FY20.

STI

LTI new scheme

Fair value of share options 
recognised

Fair value of share options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Fair value of deferred retention 
bonus recognised (refer section 
5.3.2)

296,750

251,625

174,487

-

-

-

77,984

(4,013)

-

-

45,698

20,969

FY19 amount includes one third of the FY19 award value. FY20 amount includes one third of 
the FY19 award plus one third of the FY20 award value. 
The growth shown does not represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

Fair value of LTI recognised

220,185

94,940

Total remuneration

764,185

552,815

% growth on prior year excluding LTI 
and termination benefits

19%

partial year

Prior year figures are not reflective of a full year. Mr Jobbins commenced employment on 30 
October 2018.

% growth on prior year including LTI 
and termination benefits

38%

partial year

Prior year figures are not reflective of a full year. Mr Jobbins commenced employment on 30 
October 2018.

If Mr Jobbins had commenced employment on 1 October 2018, the FY20 growth on prior year, excluding LTI and termination benefits would have 
been 9% compared to reported net profit after tax growth of 8%. The CFO’s fixed remuneration was increased by 10% for FY20.

90

91

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
FY21 aggregate fee pool and Non-Executive Director fees

It is proposed that the current fee pool remain unchanged for FY21, 
capped at $1,500,000. Non-executive Director fees are set to increase 
in line with CPI, as per Board policy.

8. 

Service agreements for the  
Executive KMP

Remuneration and other terms and conditions of employment for 
Executive KMP are formalised in service agreements which are 
reviewed each year. All Executive KMP service agreements are 
rolling contracts which cease following notice of termination by either 
employee or employer.

The following table presents some of the key contractual 
arrangements for the Executive KMP:  

KMP

Contract term

Termination notice 
by either party

Post-employment 
restraint

Executive Chairman

CEO

Other Executive KMP

Ongoing

Ongoing

Ongoing

3 months

6 months

12 weeks

12 months

12 months

12 months

If an Executive KMP resigns, payment in lieu of notice that is not 
worked is provided, in addition to any statutory entitlements. No other 
additional termination or post-employment benefits are provided on 
termination of employment. Refer to sections 5.2 and 5.3 respectively 
for treatment of STIs and LTIs on termination of Executive KMP.

The Executive Chairman’s fixed remuneration package is established 
to compensate him for executing the role of Chairman and also for that 
of Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer (as tabled below).

In FY20, the Chairman’s fixed remuneration consists of:

Role

Chairman

Cheif Strategy and Innovation Officer

Total fixed remuneration

Fixed remuneration

131,237

376,319

507,556

The Executive Chairman also receives an STI component for his role 
as Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer. 

As the Chairman is also an Executive, the remuneration for performing 
the Chairman role (exclusive of Directors’ fees) is not included in the 
Non-Executive Director Fee Pool.

6.  Remuneration governance
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for developing the 
remuneration framework for TechnologyOne Executives and making 
recommendations related to remuneration to the Board. The 
Committee develops the remuneration philosophy and policies for 
Board approval.

The responsibilities of the Committee are outlined in their Charter, 
which is reviewed annually by the Board.

The key responsibilities of the Committee include:

 • Advising the Board on TechnologyOne’s policy for Executive and 

Director remuneration

 • Making recommendations to the Board on the remuneration 

arrangements for Executives and Directors to ensure they are 
aligned with TechnologyOne’s vision and are set competitively to 
the market

 • Approving KMP terms of employment

In making recommendations to the Board, the Committee reviews 
the appropriateness of the nature and amount of remuneration to 
Executives and NEDs on an annual basis.  

In carrying out its duties, the Committee can engage external 
advisors who are independent of management. During the year the 
committee engaged an external advisor in relation to the drafting of 
this remuneration report.  

7.  Non-executive Director fees

Determination of Non-executive Director fees

In FY20, Board fees were set at $141,000 per Director, including 
statutory superannuation contributions. This represents a 9% 
increase on prior year and is in line with independent consultation. 
The increase reflects a fee at the 50th percentile of comparable 
companies by market capitalisation and further provides alignment 
with market rates and previous statements to shareholders. No 
additional fees are paid in respect of committee attendance.

Directors’ Fees are normally reviewed every three years by an 
independent consultant and the setting of fees is to be consistent 
with comparable companies by market capitalisation. Fee increases 

between independent reviews are capped at CPI. 

Aggregate fee pool

The total amount of Directors’ fees is capped at a maximum pool 
that is approved by shareholders. The current fee pool is capped 
at $1,500,000, which was approved by shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting on 26 February 2019. The increase in fee pool from 
FY18 ($1,000,000) acknowledges additional Directors added to the 
Board since the last review. 

Non-executive Directors receive fees to recognise their contribution to 
the work of the Board and the associated committees that they serve. 
Non-executive Directors do not receive any performance-related 
remuneration.

Statutory remuneration

9. 
The information in the table below is based on the statutory accounting fair value of remuneration earned for each KMP and does not represent 
the value offered or realised. 

The deferred retention bonus was introduced in FY19. The total value of the award is retained and will only be realised at the conclusion of the 
two-year period following the end of the financial year, on the condition that the Executive KMP remains employed for the entire deferral period. 
For accounting purposes, the expense in relation to this award is recognised over the total three-year deferral period. The value included in the 
table below for FY19 represents one third of the FY19 award value. The value included for FY20 includes one third of the FY19 award value plus 
one third of the FY20 award value. The growth seen in the table below does not represent growth in remuneration offered or realised.

Total statutory accounting fair value remuneration for Executives increased by 14% from FY19 as Chief Financial Officer, Paul Jobbins, was included 
for only part of FY19. Total remuneration packages offered for continuing executives employed across both periods grew by 5%, below net profit 
after tax growth of 8%.

Directors’ fees increased by 9% per Director on an annualised basis, in line with the agreed board policy. 

s
t
fi
e
n
e
b
t
n
e
m
y
o
p
m
e

l

t
s
o
P

Short-term employee benefits

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r

d
e
x
i
F

’
s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
$ D

s
e
e
f

$

n
o
i
t
a
u
n
n
a
r
e
p
u
S

$

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
d
e
x
fi

l

a
t
o
T

$

e
v
i
t
n
e
c
n
I

m
r
e
t
-
t
r
o
h
S

s
t
fi
e
n
e
b
n
o
i
t
a
n
m
r
e
$ T

i

$

Long-term incentives

s
u
n
o
b
n
o
i
t
n
e
t
e
r
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
D

$

s
n
o
i
t
p
o
e
r
a
h
s

f
o
e
u
a
V

l

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
p
f
o
e
u
a
$ V

l

r
a
e
y
r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

I
T
L
l
c
x
e

r
a
e
y
r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

I
T
L
l
c
n

i

$

s
t
h
g
i
r

$

l

a
t
o
T

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

118,313

11,240

129,553

128,767

12,233

141,000

69,016

6,557

75,573

75,114

7,136

82,250

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

9%

9%

129,553

141,000

87%

87%

75,573

82,250

N/A

N/A

-

Name

Non-executive Directors

R McLean  
(Non-executive Director)

J Mactaggart  
(Non-executive Director)

K Blinco  
(Non-executive Director)

R Anstey  
(Non-executive Director)

Dr J Andrews  
(Non-executive Director 

S Doyle  
(Non-executive Director)

C Rosenberg (Non-
executive Director)1

P Ball (Non-Executive 
Director)2

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

2020

2019

92

93

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
s
t
fi
e
n
e
b
t
n
e
m
y
o
p
m
e

l

t
s
o
P

Short-term employee benefits

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r

d
e
x
i
F

’
s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
$ D

s
e
e
f

$

n
o
i
t
a
u
n
n
a
r
e
p
u
S

$

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r
d
e
x
fi

l

a
t
o
T

$

e
v
i
t
n
e
c
n
I

m
r
e
t
-
t
r
o
h
S

s
t
fi
e
n
e
b
n
o
i
t
a
n
m
r
e
$ T

i

$

Name

Executives

A Di Marco  
(Executive Chairman)3

E Chung  
(Chief Executive Officer)

S MacDonald 
(Chief Operating Officer)

P Jobbins (Chief 
Financial Officer)4

2020

356,309

131,237

20,010

507,556

1,052,397

2019

172,171

310,548

19,812

502,531

973,648

2020

513,058

2019

507,978

2020

426,934

2019

422,707

2020

227,240

2019

186,438

-

-

-

-

-

-

20,010

533,068

674,824

19,812

527,790

623,229

20,010

446,944

461,130

19,812

442,519

423,476

20,010

247,250

296,750

19,812

206,250

251,625

Total KMP

2020

1,523,541

131,237

80,040

1,734,818

2,485,101

2019

1,289,294

310,548

79,248

1,679,090

2,271,978

Total Senior Executives

2020

1,523,541

1,107,721

172,806

2,804,068

2,485,101

2019

1,289,294

1,089,442

153,245

2,531,981

2,271,978

1Mr Rosenberg was appointed on 27 February 2019.

2Mr Ball was appointed on 2 March 2020.

Long-term incentives

s
u
n
o
b
n
o
i
t
n
e
t
e
r
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
D

$

-

-

s
n
o
i
t
p
o
e
r
a
h
s

f
o
e
u
a
V

l

e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
p
f
o
e
u
a
$ V

l

-

-

108,171

455,385

51,936

402,808

r
a
e
y
r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

I
T
L
l
c
x
e

r
a
e
y
r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

I
T
L
l
c
n

i

$

s
t
h
g
i
r

$

l

a
t
o
T

-

-

-

-

1,559,953

6%

6%

1,476,179

1,771,448

5%

10%

1,605,763

73,717

235,508

69,404

1,286,703

5%

8%

35,290

234,421

55,431

1,191,137

45,698

174,487

20,969

73,971

-

-

764,185

19%

38%

552,815

227,586

865,380

69,404

5,382,289

7%

12%

108,195

711,200

55,431

4,825,894

227,586

865,380

69,404

6,451,539

10%

14%

108,195

711,200

55,431

5,678,785

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3Mr Di Marco was offered an LTI of $400K which he declined in the 2019/2020 year, as he has in previous years. The Remuneration Committee acknowledges that Mr Di Marco’s existing significant shareholding in TechnologyOne 
provides the benefits that the LTI aims to achieve. Mr Di Marco’s STI is calculated as 1.26% of Group NPBT. Mr Di Marco’s remuneration grew by 6% on the prior year, due to his fixed remuneration being up 1% and his STI up 8% in 
line with company profit.

4Mr Jobbins commenced employment on 30 October 2018. 

10.  Aditional statutory disclosures

10.1 

Long-term incentive scheme

In 2016, TechnologyOne replaced its previous Executive Option Plan (EOP) with an LTI plan aligned to market, shareholder and Executive 
requirements. Options and EPRs issued under the new plan are outlined in the tables below.

Options

2020

Name

Edward Chung

Stuart MacDonald

Paul Jobbins

Opening balance of 
share options

Number of options 
granted during the 
period

Number of options 
exercised during the 
period

Number of options 
forfeited during the 
period*

Closing balance of 
share options

Vested and 
exercisable

591,753

697,197

215,456

264,639

167,396

146,516

-

(271,137)

-

(13,931)

(54,227)

-

842,461

539,229

361,972

402,758

371,833

-

Executive Performance Rights

2020

Name

Edward Chung

Stuart MacDonald

Paul Jobbins

Opening balance of 
EPRs

Number of EPRs 
granted during the 
period

Number of EPRs 
exercised during the 
period

Number of EPRs 
forfeited during the 
period*

Closing balance 
of EPRs

Vested and 
exercisable

-

46,885

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

46,885

-

-

-

-

Unvested

439,703

167,396

361,972

Unvested

-

46,885

-

*Options and EPRs forfeited during the period, are due to non-achievement of performance targets set by the Board for 2020. The Board is 
focused on ensuring that management remuneration and shareholder value are aligned by setting performance targets that create long-term 

shareholder wealth.

For details of grants under the previous EOP plan, please refer to sections 10.2 and 10.3.

10.2 

Quarantined Executive Option Plan (EOP) (now  
superseded)

Share options were granted to Executives by the Board based on the 
option plan approved by the Board.

These options were issued to existing Executives and TechnologyOne 
is required to honour these pre-existing contracts. The variation to 
the 2016 LTI plan allows for options with the condition that there is no 
discount to the strike price at grant date. The performance criteria still 
apply as per the 2015 LTI plan. These pre-existing contracts have been 
quarantined and as existing Executive Contracts come to an end, they 
will be renegotiated so that the LTI is based on the 2016 LTI plan going 
forward. All new appointments of Executives to the Company will be 
under the 2016 LTI plan. For the sake of disclosure, details of the now 
obsolete and quarantined EOP are provided below.

Under the EOP, options were issued with typically between 0% and 
50% discount on the volume weighted average price for the 10 days 
prior to the grant date. The discount could be forfeited prior to vesting 
at the Board's discretion based on the performance of the Executive. 
The option could also be withheld by the Executive Chairman for 
unsatisfactory performance.

The options vest if and when the Executive satisfies the period of 
service contained in each option grant. 

The contractual life of each option varies between two and five years. 
There are no cash settlement alternatives.

Options granted under this plan carry no dividend or voting rights.

When exercisable, each option is convertible into one ordinary 
TechnologyOne share. Further information is set out in note 31 to the 
financial statements.

94

95

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
10.3 

Historical incentive outcomes under the previous options plan

TechnologyOne previously issued options under a now obsolete Executive Option Plan (EOP). The EOP has now been quarantined and all new 
Executives to the Company, as well as existing Executives when their existing contracts come to an end, are offered LTIs under the new LTI plan.

The numbers of options over ordinary shares issued under the quarantined plan and held during the year is set out below. 

2019

Name

Directors of TechnologyOne Limited

Balance at start of the year

Purchased during the year

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

Dr J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

2019

Name

Senior Executive of the Group

E Chung

S MacDonald

P Jobbins

31,378,500

141,000

42,902,500

260,000

25,500

30,600

-

-

Balance at start of the year

399,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

12,375

27,533

Received during  
the year on the  
exercise options

167,000

241,700

-

(4,000,000)

(30,000)

(4,000,000)

(60,000)

-

-

-

-

27,378,500

111,000

38,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

12,375

27,533

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

-

(241,700)

-

566,000

-

-

10.6 

Loans to Key Management Personnel

There have been no loans to Directors or Executives during the financial year (2019 - nil).

10.7 

Other transactions with Key Management Personnel

During the year there were no transactions with the Key Management Personnel. This report is made in accordance with a resolution of 
Directors.

Edward Chung is the only current Executive KMP with LTIs issued under this plan. 

2020

Name

Balance at start of 
the year

Granted as 
compensation

Exercised

Forfeited

Balance at the end 
of the year

Vested and 
exercisable

Edward Chung

334,000

-

(167,000)

-

167,000

-

Unvested

167,000

10.4 

Director shareholdings

Directors are required to hold a minimum shareholding of one year’s (pre-tax) Directors’ fees in TechnologyOne shares. Directors are required to 
rectify any short fall within a 12 month period. New Directors are allowed 36 months to meet this requirement.

The Board in total holds 51,670,650 shares representing 16% of the total shareholding of the Company.

10.5 

Equity instruments held by Key Management Personnel

The number of shares in the Group held during the financial year by each Director and Senior Executive of Technology One Limited, including 
their personally related parties, are set out below. There were no shares granted during the reporting period as compensation.

2020

Name

Directors of TechnologyOne Limited

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

Dr J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

2020

Name

Senior Executive of the Group

E Chung

S MacDonald

P Jobbins

Balance at start of the year

Purchased during the year

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

27,378,500

111,000

38,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

12,375

27,533

9,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

5,905

-

9,000

(7,000,000)

(41,263)

(8,000,000)

-

-

-

-

-

20,378,500

69,737

30,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

18,280

27,533

18,000

Balance at start of the year

566,000

-

-

Received during  
the year on the  
exercise options

167,000

271,137

-

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

-

(271,137)

-

733,000

-

-

96

97

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
Corporate Governance Statement

The Board of Directors of the Company is responsible for its corporate 
governance. The Board guides and monitors the business and affairs 
of the Company on behalf of the shareholders by whom they are 
elected and to whom they are accountable.

 • Setting the highest business standards and code of ethical 

behaviour.

 • Overseeing the establishment and implementation of the risk 
management system, and annually reviewing its effectiveness.

The Directors have established guidelines for the operation of the 
Board and its Committees. Set out below are the Company’s main 
corporate governance practices.

The Technology One Board routinely considers industry governance 
initiatives in consideration of their benefit to the Company and its 
many stakeholders. The Board has adopted the 4th Edition of the ASX 
Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations.   

The Corporate Governance Statement, as well as supporting 
documents are available on the Company’s internet site: www.
technologyonecorp.com/company/investors/corporate-governance.

Board of Directors
The Board of the Company currently comprises nine Directors and 
includes

Name 

Position

Appointed

Adrian Di Marco

Executive Chairman - major shareholder

08/12/1999

 • Decisions relating to the appointment or removal of the Company 

Secretary.

 • To review and evaluate the performance of the Board as a whole, 
each Committee, key Executives and each Director on an annual 
basis.

The Board has the authority to delegate any of their powers to 
committees consisting of such Directors and external consultants, 
as the Directors think fit. The Board has established a number of 
committees as follows: 

 • Nomination and Governance Committee

 • Audit and Risk Committee

 • Remuneration Committee

Board papers are prepared for the Directors, containing detailed 
operational reports from each region and department in the Company, 
highlighting:

Ronald McLean

Non-Executive Director – independent

08/12/1999

John Mactaggart

Non-Executive Director - major shareholder

08/12/1999

 • Operational performance.

 • Initiatives undertaken/completed.

Kevin Blinco

Non-Executive Director - independent

01/04/20041

 • Identified problems/risks and proposed solutions.

Richard Anstey

Non-Executive Director – independent

02/12/2005

Jane Andrews

Non-Executive Director – independent

22/02/2016

Sharon Doyle

Non-Executive Director - independent

Cliff Rosenberg

Non-Executive Director - independent

28/02/2018

27/02/2019

Peter Ball

Non-Executive Director - independent

02/03/2020

1Kevin Blinco will not seek re-election at the upcoming AGM (ceasing to be a Director, 23 February 2021).

The following information is provided in the Corporate Governance 
section of the Company’s Annual Report:

 • Details of names, qualifications, skills, experience and dates of 

appointment of each Board member.

 • The number of meetings of the Board and the names of 

attendees.

 • Explanation of any departures from the ASX Corporate 

Governance Principles and Recommendations.

The role of the Board is as follows:

 • Setting objectives, goals and strategic direction for management, 

with a view to maximising shareholder value.

The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer also prepare a 
summary report that highlights:

 • Financial performance year to date and forecast for the full year.

 • Significant issues.

 • Significant changes proposed.

 • Proposed strategic initiatives.

On a regular basis, members of the Executive/Management Team are 
invited to present to the Board directly and to answer questions the 
Board may have. 

The strategy of the Company, as well as matters reserved to the 
Board, are reviewed annually by the Board.

Matters reserved to the Board
Matters that are reserved to the Board are as follows:

 • Communications with shareholders and the market in general, 
including ASX announcements, through the Chairman of the 
Board.

 • Input into and subsequent approval of corporate strategy and 

performance objectives.

 • Input into and ratifying any significant changes to the Company.

 • Adopting an annual budget and monitoring financial performance.

 • Reviewing and ratifying systems of risk management, internal 

compliance and control, codes of conduct and legal compliance 
(ASX, ASIC, and ATO).

 • Ensuring adequate internal controls exist and are appropriately 

 • Input into and subsequent approval of significant organisational 

monitored for compliance.

structure/restructure.

 • Ensuring significant business risks are identified and appropriately 

 • Review of the Managing Director, Chief Executive Officer and 

managed.

 • Selecting, appointing and reviewing the performance of the 

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

Company Secretary to the relevant Code of Conduct established 
by the Board.

 • Appointing and removing the Managing Director and Chief 

Executive Officer and monitoring their performance respectively.

 • Input into and subsequent approval of the budget including 
Operating Expenditure and Capital Expenditure, and any 
significant variations.

 • Oversight of the Company, including its control and accountability 

systems.

 • Input into and subsequent approval of changes to internal systems 

and controls.

 • Review, and accept/reject recommendations from sub-committees 

such as Audit and Risk, Remuneration and Nomination and 
Governance committees.

 • Input into and ratifying any acquisitions and divestitures.

 • Oversee the establishment and implementation of a risk 

management system, and review regularly the effectiveness of the 
Company’s implementation of that system.

All other matters are referred to management.

Board Skills
As a collective, the Board has extensive commercial skills and 
experience which provide a solid base for the governance of the 
Company. The Board has a combination of experience in the following 
core areas:

 • Strategic and Commercial Acumen

 • Finance and Taxation

 • Risk and Compliance

 • IT and Communications Industry

 • Software and Product Development

 • Start-ups and Early Stage Investments

 • Corporate Governance

 • Sales and Marketing

 • People, Culture and Conduct

 • Executive Management and Leadership

 • Listed Entities

 • International Business

The Board as a whole benefits from the combination of the Director’s 
individual skills, experience and expertise in particular areas, as well 
as the varying perspectives that arise from the interaction arising from 
the Board’s diverse backgrounds.

The Board believes that its current membership provides a 
suitable level of skills to properly guide the Company and deliver 
the Company’s strategic objectives and provide a solid base for 
governance. 

The Board assesses its level of skills annually and will address any 
requirements for additional skills that it feels would be in the best 
interest of the Company in response to wider market factors and the 
growth of the Company. The Board has determined the core skills for 
its governance of the Company.

Director Principles
The Directors operate in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The Board should comprise of at least three members, but 

no more than 10. The current Board membership is nine. The 
Board may increase the number of Directors where it is felt that 
additional expertise in specific areas is required. The Company 
believes for its current size, a smaller Board allows it to be more 
effective and to react quickly to opportunities and threats.

 • The Board should be comprised of Directors with an appropriate 
mix of skills, qualifications, expertise, experience and diversity. 
The skills, experience and expertise which the Board considers 
to be particularly relevant include those listed above. In respect 
of diversity, the Board recognises that diversity relates to, but is 
not limited to gender, age, ethnicity and cultural background. The 
Board values diversity and recognises the individual contribution 
that people can make and the opportunity for innovation that 
diversity brings.

 • The Board shall meet on both a planned basis and an unplanned 
basis when required and have available all necessary information 
to participate in an informed discussion of agenda items.

 • The Directors are entitled to be paid expenses incurred in 

connection with the execution of their duties as Directors. Each 
Director is therefore able to seek independent professional advice 
at the Company’s expense, where it is in connection with their 
duties and responsibilities as Director. The Company policy is that 
a Director wishing to seek independent legal advice should advise 
the Chairman at least 48 hours before doing so.

 • The Directors and Officers will not engage in short term trading 

of the Company’s shares. Furthermore, the Directors and Officers 
will not buy or sell shares at a time when they possess information 
which, if disclosed publicly, would be likely to materially affect 
the market price of the Company’s shares. Information is not 
considered to be generally available until a reasonable time has 
elapsed to allow the market to absorb these announcements. A 
detailed policy exists on this matter – refer below, section: Trading 
in Company Securities.

 • Directors have a clear understanding of the corporate and 

regulatory expectations of them. To this end formal letters of 
appointment are made for each Director setting out the key terms 
and conditions, any special duties or arrangements, remunerations 
and expenses, their rights and entitlements, confidentiality and 
rights of access to corporate information, as well as Indemnity and 
Insurance cover provided. 

 • Newly appointed Directors undertake an induction course 

covering the Company’s strategy, products and operations. They 
are also provided a copy of the Company’s constitution, charters 
and key policies.

 • Directors are required to disclose Directors’ interests and any 
matters that affect the Director’s independence. This includes 
disclosure of conflicts of interest, which may include transactions 
with family members or related entities.

 • If there is a potential conflict of interest, conflicted Directors must 
immediately inform the Board and abstain from deliberations 
on such matters. Such Directors are not permitted to exercise 
any influence over other Board members. If the Board believes 
the conflict of interest is material or significant the Directors 
concerned will not be allowed to attend the meeting or receive 
the relevant Board papers.

98

99

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleDirector Independence
The Board comprises a majority of independent Non-Executive 
Directors who have broad commercial experience and bring 
independence, accountability and judgement in discharging the 
Board’s responsibilities to ensure optimal returns to shareholders and 
the ongoing provision of benefits to the Company’s employees.

The Board is required to disclose any new information that could, 
or would be reasonably perceived, to influence, or reasonably be 
perceived to influence, in a material respect their capacity to bring an 
independent judgement to bear on the issues before the Board and to 
act in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders.

The company has set the objective to increase the Board size, with the 
aim of adding additional independent directors, with Jane Andrews’ 
appointment in the 2016 financial year, Sharon Doyle’s appointment 
in the 2018 Financial Year, Cliff Rosenberg’s appointment in the 2019 
Financial Year and  Peter Ball appointed in the 2020 Financial Year, 
resulting in an indisputable majority of independent directors.

TechnologyOne is also progressing with a Committee composition 
strategy which continues to comply with the ASX Corporate 
Governance Principle recommendations while transitioning newly 
appointed Directors into the appropriate Committees once they have 
had sufficient time to develop a comprehensive understanding of 
TechnologyOne’s operations.

The independence of the Directors is assessed annually in 
accordance with the ASX Corporate Governance Principles and 
Recommendations.

While the ASX Corporate Governance Principles and 
Recommendations and proxy advisors consider the tenure of a 
Director as affecting independence, the Board believes that this is not 
a material consideration due to the way TechnologyOne facilitates 
interactions between Directors and Senior Executives and the benefits 
that tenure brings with established, deeper levels of company 
specific knowledge. TechnologyOne does not have casual, ad-hoc 
informal relationships between the Directors and Senior Executives 
and provides only formal interaction between the Board and Senior 
Executives in order to maintain the independence of each Director.  
All interactions are formal in nature and documented. TechnologyOne 
believes that by doing this, it maintains the independence of the 
Directors and nullifies the impact on tenure on independence. These 
formal interactions include presentations to the Board throughout 
the year on their business unit strategies and outcomes. Any other 
interaction by a Board Member and a Senior Executive is only under 
prior approval by the Chairman.

TechnologyOne will only enter into an agreement for the provision 
of consultancy or similar services by a Director or senior executive 
or by a related party of theirs if: TechnologyOne has independent 
advice that the services being provided are outside the ordinary 
scope of their duties as a Director or senior executive; the agreement 
is on arm’s length terms; and, the remuneration payable under 
it is reasonable and with full disclosure of the material terms to 
securityholders.

The independence of Mr Ron Mclean has been debated by some 
corporate advisory groups because he was a past employee of 
TechnologyOne, ceasing to be an executive in 2004. The Board is of 
the opinion that, due to the period of time that has lapsed since Mr 
Mclean’s employment with the company 14 years ago, Mr Mclean is 
considered as being independent. Mr McLean’s appointment also took 
place in 1992, prior to the introduction of the ASX’s 1st edition of the 
Principles of Good Corporate Governance in March 2003.

The ASX guidelines commentary provides the following guidelines 
note which supports this position: “The mere fact that a director 
has served on a board for a substantial period does not mean that 
he or she has become too close to management to be considered 
independent. However, the board should regularly assess whether 
that might be the case for any director who has served in that position 
for more than 10 years.”

The ASX guidelines also states that it “recognises that the interests 
of a listed entity and its security holders are likely to be well served 
by having a mix of directors, some with a longer tenure with a deep 
understanding of the entity and its business and some with a shorter 
tenure with fresh ideas and perspective.”

Lead Independent Director
The Company will appoint a Lead Independent Director in the next 
12 months once the new independent non-executive Directors have 
been appointed and established in their roles.  The Lead Independent 
Director will represent the interests of shareholders where the 
Executive Chairman is unable to do so due to a conflict of interest.  

The role of Lead Independent Director will include:

 • Representing the independent Directors as the most senior 

independent Director;  

 • Acting as principle liaison between the independent Directors and 

the Chairman; and

 • Advising the Board with reference to the other independent 
Directors on the matters where there is a conflict of interest.

The roles of Deputy Chairman and Lead Independent Director will be 
separated to further strengthen the overall independence of the Board 
and to allow greater flexibility in responding to governance issues and 

in supporting the interests of the shareholders.

Director Appointments
All Directors, both Executive and Non-Executive, receive written 
notifications of their appointment and a new Director induction 
pack which details the terms and conditions of their appointment, 
remuneration (including superannuation contributions), continuous 
disclosure requirements (including interests in the Company), ongoing 
confidentiality obligations, Company policies on when to seek 
independent professional advice, the Company’s indemnity  
and insurance measures.  

Prior to appointment, appropriate checks are undertaken on the 
candidates and relevant information provided to shareholders 
to consider when voting on the election of the Director. Relevant 
information is also provided for shareholders to consider when voting 
to re-elect existing Directors upon rotation. Executive Directors and 
senior management of the Company will also have formal written 
employment agreements which set out the terms of their employment, 
roles and responsibilities, reporting lines, remuneration, confidentiality 
and termination provisions.

All Directors and senior management are required to comply with key 
corporate policies which include, but are not limited to, Share Trading 
Policy, Insider Trading Policy, Privacy Policy, Diversity Policy and Code 
of Conduct.

All new Directors and senior management participate in the 
Company’s formal on-boarding program which includes an induction 
program which incorporates meetings with key senior executives.

Company Secretary
The Company has a Company Secretary that is appointed by the 
Board by resolution. The Company Secretary is accountable directly to 
the Board, through the Chairman.

The role of the Company Secretary is as follows:

 • Advising the Board and Committees on governance matters.

 • Review the performance of the external auditor on an annual 

basis.

 • Recommend the selection and the appointment of the external 

Auditors, based on specified criteria.

 • Oversee the ongoing development by management of an 

enterprise-wide risk management framework for management of 
material risks.

 • Monitoring adherence of Board and Committees to policies and 

 • Periodically review the adequacy and effectiveness of the 

procedures.

 • Coordinating timely completion and despatch of Board and 

Committee papers.

 • Ensuring business at Board and Committee meeting is accurately 

Company’s policies and procedures relating to risk management 
and compliance.

 • Make recommendations to the Board on key risk management 

performance indicators and levels of risk appetite.

captured in the minutes.

 • Oversight and development of the Company’s group taxation 

 • Helping to organise and facilitate induction and professional 

matters.

development of Directors.

 • Review of taxation governance processes, policies, control 

Audit & Risk Committee
The Board has established an Audit & Risk Committee. The committee 
is comprised of:

framework and reporting.

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

The Audit and Risk Committee Charter is available on the Company’s 

Name

Peter Ball (Chair)

Jane Andrews

Sharon Doyle

Kevin Blinco

Position

website.

Independent Non-Executive Director 

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Principles of the Audit  
& Risk Committee
The committee operates in accordance with the following broad 

Independent Non-Executive Director1 

principles:

1Kevin Blinco will not seek re-election at the upcoming AGM (ceasing to be a Director, 23 February 2021).

The role of the committee is to:

 • Advise and assist the Board in fulfilling its responsibilities relating 
to financial management, risk oversight and reporting functions 
and in safeguarding the Company's assets;

 • Ensure the integrity in financial reporting (refer section below – 

Safeguard Integrity in Financial Reporting).

 • Provide a means of easy access to the Board for the external 
auditors in order to assist them in performing their functions;

 • Receive and review reports from the external Auditor.

 • Review for accuracy financial statements for each reporting period 

prior to approval by the Board, and publishing.

 • Ensure that systems of internal control are functioning effectively 

and economically and that these systems and practices contribute 
to their achievement of the Company’s corporate objectives.

 • Ensure required declarations from the Company’s CFO and Chief 

Executive are received for each reporting period.

 • Monitor compliance with the requirements of the Corporations 
Act, Listing Rules, Australian and Foreign Taxation Offices and 
other related legal obligations.

 • Ensure that the financial statements for each reporting period 

comply with appropriate accounting standards.

 • Regularly review Accounting Standards and Company Policies in 
conjunction with the Auditors and recommend adoption/changes 
to the Board.

 • Directly follow-up action where considered necessary.

 • Relate any matters of concern to the Board.

 • Assign the Secretary of the Committee such duties and 

responsibilities as the Committee may deem appropriate.

 • Do other things and take other actions as are necessary or 

prudent to fulfil the responsibilities of the Committee, provided 
that no action will be taken without prior approval of the Board.

 • TechnologyOne requires the rotation of the external audit partner 
every five years. The Audit and Risk Committee includes members 
who are financially literate; and at least one member who has 

financial expertise, preferably a qualified accountant.

Remuneration Committee
The Board has established a Remuneration Committee. 

The committee is comprised of:

Name

Position

Jane Andrews (Chair)

Independent Non-Executive Director

Cliff Rosenberg

Ron McLean

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

 • Ensure the Internal Audit Function maintains a high standard of 

The role of the committee is:

performance

 • To advise the Board with regard to the Company’s broad policy for 

 • Oversight of the process to ensure the independence and 

Executive and Director remuneration.

competence of the Company’s external auditors.

100

101

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple • To determine, on behalf of the Board, the individual remuneration 

 • Recommendation of, and undertaking the appropriate checks, 

packages for Executives and Directors.

before for the appointment of new Directors.

 • To give the Company’s Executives encouragement to enhance 

 • Recommendation of, and undertaking the appropriate checks, for 

 • Is not a substantial shareholder of the Company, as defined by 

Section 9 of the Corporations Act, or an officer of a company that 
is a substantial shareholder.

the endorsement or non-endorsement of existing Directors.

 • Is not directly associated with a substantial shareholder of the 

the Company’s performance and to ensure that they are fairly, but 
responsibly, rewarded for their individual contribution.

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

The Remuneration Committee Charter is available on the Company’s 
website.

Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration is determined by the Board 
within the aggregate amount per annum which may be paid in 
Directors’ fees.

Principles of the Remuneration 
Committee
The committee operates in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The committee should provide the packages needed to attract, 
retain and motivate Executives, but avoid paying more than is 
necessary.

 • Ensuring that an effective induction process is in place for new 

Board members.

 • Review and oversight of the Company’s Corporate Governance 

Statement and governance related policies.

 • Oversight of ESG strategy and Sustainability Reporting.

 • Oversee compliance with Modern Slavery Regulations.

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

The Nomination and Governance Committee Charter is available on 
the Company’s website.

Principles of the Nomination  
& Governance Committee
The committee operates in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The committee should judge where to position the Company 

 • The Nomination and Governance Committee is entitled to seek 

relative to other companies.  Be aware of comparable companies’ 
pay, but exercise caution.

 • The committee should be sensitive to the wider scene, especially 

with regard to salary increases.

 • Performance related elements should form a significant proportion 
of the package; should align interests with those of shareholders; 
and should provide keen incentives.

Nomination & Governance 
Committee
The Board has established a Nomination & Governance Committee. 
The Committee is comprised of:

Name

Position

Richard Anstey (Chair)

Independent Non-Executive Director

Sharon Doyle

Jane Andrews

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

The role of the Committee is as follows:

 • Assessment of the necessary and desirable competencies and 

experience for Board membership.

 • Evaluation of the membership of the Board, Audit and Risk and 

Remuneration committees, and their membership.

 • Evaluation initially and on an on-going basis of Non-Executive 
Director’s professional development, commitments, and their 
ability to commit the necessary time required to fulfil their duties 
to a high standard.

 • Adherence by Directors to the Director’s Code of Conduct and to 

good corporate governance.

 • Review of Board succession plans.

 • Recommendation for changes to committees.

the advice of an external consultant.

 • The Nomination and Governance Committee will make 

recommendations to the Board. The Board is responsible 
to appoint the most suitable candidate, after receiving 
recommendations from the Nomination and Governance 
Committee. The nominated appointee upon acceptance will hold 
office until the next Annual General Meeting, where the appointee 
must retire and is entitled to stand for re-election. 

 • The Board is responsible to either recommend/not recommend 

the endorsement of a Director at the next Annual General 
Meeting.

 • The name of all candidates submitted for election as Director 

is accompanied with necessary information required by 
shareholders to make an informed decision including biographical 
details, competencies, qualifications, details of relationships 
between the Company, the candidate and Directors; other 
directorships held, particulars of other positions held which 
involve significant time commitments, and any other particulars 
required by law or good corporate governance. For existing 
Directors standing for re-election, the number of years as a 
Director of TechnologyOne will also be provided.

 • Directors (with the exception of the Managing Director who is 

appointed by the Board) must stand for re-election every three 
years in accordance with the Company’s Constitution.  One third 
of the Directors retire from office at each Annual General Meeting.

 • A structured process has been established to review and evaluate 
the performance of the Board and its Committees. This process 
also identifies ways to improve their performance, interaction with 
management, and quality of information provided.

Assessment of Director 
Independence
The Board has determined that an independent Director will meet all 
of the following criteria:

 • Is not an Executive Director (i.e. not a member of the management) 

Company.

 • Within the last three years, has not been employed in an Executive 

capacity by the Company or another group member, or been 
appointed a Director within three years after ceasing to hold such 
employment, insofar as the Director was not appointed prior to the 
introduction of the ASX Principles of Good Corporate Governance 
in March 2003.

 • Within the last three years, has not been a principal of a material 
professional adviser or a material consultant to the Company or 
another group member, or an employee materially associated with 
the service provider.

 • Is not a material supplier or customer of the Company or other 
group member, or an officer of or otherwise associated, either 
directly or indirectly, with a material supplier or customer. This 
includes family members being in these categories.

 • Has no material contractual relationship with the Company or 

another group member other than as a Director of the Company.

 • Is free from any interest and any business or other relationship 
which could, or could reasonably be perceived to, materially 
interfere with the Director’s ability to act in the best interest of the 
Company.

Corporate Governance Principles  
& Recommendations

Ethical Standards and Code of Conduct

All Directors, managers and employees are expected to act with the 
utmost integrity and objectivity, observe the highest standards of 
behaviour and business ethics, and strive at all times to enhance the 
reputation and performance of the Company.

A Code of Conduct has been established for each of the following:

 • Directors

 • Chief Executive Officer

 • Chief Financial Officer

 • Executives

 • Employees

Each of the Codes of Conduct has been approved by the Board and 
given their full support.

The codes address:

 • Responsibilities to shareholders, and clients

 • “The TechnologyOne Way”, which refers to the success of the 
company coming from our shared values, our entrepreneurial 
spirit and innovation

 • Employment practices (anti-discrimination, occupational health 

and safety, etc.)

 • Responsibilities to the community

 • Responsibilities to the individual

 • Compliance with the codes

In addition, the Directors, Executive Chairman, Chief Executive 
Officer, Chief Financial Officer, Executives and all employees have 
employment agreements, which include job descriptions. These job 
descriptions describe their duties, rights and responsibilities.

In conjunction with the Code of Conduct, Technology One has 
developed a Whistle-blower Policy and Bribery and Corruption Policy.  
The Whistle-blower Policy encourages employees to come forward 
with concerns that the entity is not acting lawfully, ethically or in a 
socially responsible manner and provides suitable protections if they 
do.  The Board will be informed of any material concerns raised that 
call into question the culture of Technology One or have been raised 
under the Bribery and Corruption Policy. 

The Board is informed of any material breaches of the Code of 
Conduct by a Director or Senior Executive and of any other material 
breaches of the code that call into question the culture of the 
organisation.

Diversity Policy 
TechnologyOne has an inclusive diversity policy which covers the 
broader dimension of diversity covering aspects of gender, age, 
disability, ethnicity, marital or family status, religious or cultural 
background, sexual orientation and gender orientation within the 
total organisation, including the Board, and senior management. In 
conjunction with this policy, the Company has measurable objectives 
which are assessed and reported in the annual report.

The diversity of TechnologyOne remains fundamental to our ongoing 
success. TechnologyOne has established a Diversity Policy which 
reflects the company’s commitment to providing an inclusive 
workplace.

A summary of the Diversity Policy is following:

 • Diversity is one of TechnologyOne’s strengths. TechnologyOne 

values this diversity and recognises the individual contribution our 
people can make and the opportunity for innovation such diversity 
brings

 • TechnologyOne believes that we will achieve greater success 
by providing our people with an environment that respects the 
dignity of every individual, fosters trust, and allows every person 
the opportunity to realise their full potential

 • TechnologyOne is committed to providing an inclusive workplace 
and our commitment to diversity extends to our interactions with 
customer and suppliers

The Board established measurable objectives for 2020 and the 

objectives are:

 • Ensuring compliance with the published diversity policy

 • Not less than 30% of the Board to be of each gender by 2025 (to 

allow for the Board transition)

 • 30% of all vacant Senior Management roles are to have at least 

one female candidate shortlisted

 • Diversity target – setting targets for the number of women in 

senior roles in the organisation

 • Maintain reporting measures that are in compliance with both the 

ASX guidelines and Workplace Gender Equality Agency

 • Continue to identify employee feedback mechanisms through 

the review of existing forums and information provided as well as 
the identification of appropriate new mechanisms for employee 
consultation 

102

103

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple • Maintain existing educational programs that support diversity 

including but not limited to induction, on boarding and leadership 

programs delivered through the TechnologyOne Learning team

The Company’s 2020 Workplace Gender Equality Agency report can 

be found on the ‘Shareholders’ section of the Company’s website.

Safeguard Integrity in Financial 
Reporting
The Company has established a structure of reviews and 
authorisations designed to ensure the truthful and factual presentation 
of the Company’s financial position. This includes:

 • The establishment of an Audit and Risk Committee, and the 

review and consideration of the accounts by the Audit and Risk 
Committee

 • Process to ensure the independence and competence of the 

Company’s external auditors

 • Requirement that the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial 
Officer state in writing to the Board that the Company’s financial 
reports present a true and fair view in all material respects of 
the Company’s financial condition; operational results are in 
accordance with the relevant accounting standards and the 
Company’s Risk Management and Internal Compliance and 
Control System is operating efficiently and effectively in all 
material respects

Risk Assessment Management
The Company has adopted an active approach to risk management 
and the Board recognises that the Company’s participation in 
commercial and operational activities require a certain level of risk. As 
such, the Board has delegated the risk management function to the 
management of the Company with oversight by the Audit and Risk 
Committee. Management provides risk reporting to the Audit and Risk 
Committee at each meeting.

The Board has received assurance from the CEO and CFO that 
the declaration provided in accordance with section 295A of the 
Corporations Act is founded on a sound system of risk management 
and internal control and that the system is operating effectively in all 
material aspects in relation to the financial reporting risks.

The risk appetite of the Company takes into account the level of risk 
and risk combinations that the Board is prepared to take to achieve 
strategic objectives together with the level of risk shock that the 
Company is able to withstand.

The Board expanded the role of the Audit Committee in 2017 to 
include oversight of risk management and compliance functions and 
as such is now referred to as the Audit and Risk Committee.  The 
Committee has performed an annual risk review and have identified a 
number of key risk categories for the business. 

Material Risks

 • Ensuring that the Company’s external Auditor’s attend the 

Human Risk

Company’s Annual General Meeting each year

 • Verification of statements and data supplied in the annual 

directors’ report and other corporate reports to ensure that the 
releases to the market are accurate, balanced and understandable 
and provide investors with appropriate information to make 
informed investment decisions

 • Disclosure of the annual tax transparency statement

The Company has put the external audit services to tender in 
2020, which is another example of how the Company expresses its 
dedication to ensuring integrity of the financial reporting is maintained.

Continuous Disclosure
The Company Secretary working closely with the Executive Chairman, 
have been delegated responsibility for the continuous disclosure of 
information to the market, to ensure:

 • All investors have equal and timely access to material information 

concerning the Company, including its financial position, 
performance, ownership and governance

 • Company announcements are factual and presented in clear and 
a balanced way, requiring the disclosure of both positive and 
negative information

 • When analysts are briefed on aspects of the Company’s 

operations, the market is forewarned, and the materials used in 
such presentations are also released to the ASX and posted on 
the Company’s website

 • Any information that a reasonable person would expect to have a 
material effect on the price or value of the Company’s share price 

(as per Listing Rule 3.1) is immediately notified to the ASX

The Company has established a documented procedure to handle 
continuous disclosure requirements. Directors are provided with 
copies of all announcements made under listing rule 3.1 promptly once 
made. 

The company has identified that it has a material risk in relation to 
the human element of the business. The company manages human 
risk by undertaking half yearly performance assessment and reviews, 
performance management (where necessary), succession planning, 
key talent retention strategies, having human resources business 
partners assigned to each operating steam of the company to work 
with the business on any concerns raised, and by conducting half 
yearly surveys of managers to identify any known issues. The Board is 
provided with a summary of these issues as part of the Group Director 
– People and Culture’s report tabled at each board meeting.

Key Risks

The company’s focus on risk management is primarily conducted 
through the Audit and Risk Committee, with a number of identified 
areas of specific risks as follows:

Contract Risk

The company has established a Risk Management Committee that 
reviews all proposed new contracts with non-standard terms prior to 
signing to ensure the contracts can be fulfilled, the risks are known 
and can be managed, and that the contract can be completed 
profitably without exposing the company to ongoing liabilities.

Financial Risk

The company has an Executive Committee that reviews the company’s 
financial exposure with a particular focus in the area of outstanding 
debtors.

Data Security and Privacy Risks

TechnologyOne has successfully completed the Information Security 
Registered Assessors Program (IRAP) assessment for Protected 
classified data for Federal Government SaaS customers. Systems 
implemented to achieve IRAP accreditation benefit all our SaaS 
customers with an increased cyber security posture and greater 
certainty in a constantly evolving cyber security landscape. This 

was achieved by leveraging the strong compliance and security 
foundations established over recent years and is a testament 
to TechnologyOne’s mature security practices, accountability 
mechanisms and belief in continuous assessment and improvement.

The Company has a robust data security and privacy program 
developed in accordance with Australia’s Privacy Amendments 
(Notifiable Data Breaches) Act 2017 and the UK General Data 
Protection Regulation requirements.  This program ensures security is 
considered throughout the day to day operations of the Company and 
is backed by an independently verified process for dealing promptly 
with matters should they arise. The Company also is certified to the 
standards required in ISO27000, ISO9001, SOC1, SOC2 and SOC3.

Software Risk

The company has an executive Research and Development 
Committee that reviews Software Release management, including 
resourcing and development issues.

Insurance Risk

The Board of Technology One, on an annual basis, reviews the 
company’s insurance requirements and compares this to the level of 
cover provided to ensure it is adequately covered.

Project Risk

The Board requires the Chief Executive Officer to report on any 
project that may be at significant risk of either incurring substantial 
penalties or incurring substantial over-runs. In addition, the company 
has established a Project Risk Committee that reviews current projects 
and consulting activities to provide an early detection mechanism to 
ensure that any risks that pose a significant risk to the company are 
identified and resolved before exposing the company to potential 
liabilities.

Sustainability Risk

The Company believes that it does not have material exposure 
to specific economic, environmental or social sustainability risks. 
However, the Company recognises the importance of these to its 
stakeholders and has developed a Sustainability Report to outline the 
Company’s position and initiatives across a number of sustainability 
risks. 

The Sustainability Report provides the company’s initiatives and 
targets on items including:

 • Diversity

 • Customer Satisfaction

 • Employee Satisfaction

 • Corporate Culture

 • Ethical Business Practices

 • Community Support

 • Environmental Sustainability Practices

The Sustainability Report is available on the Company’s website.

Accounting Standards and 
Company Policies
Adhering to Accounting Standards and Company Policies, and the 
appropriate interpretation of such policies/standards, is seen as 
critical to managing the financial risk of Technology One. Accounting 

Standards and Company policies are reviewed on a regular basis 
by the Audit and Risk Committee working in conjunction with the 
Auditors, and recommendations for adoption/change are made to the 
Board. Compliance to Accounting Standards and Company policies 
are included as part of the Auditors annual review.

Internal Controls and Compliance
The Company has an internal control framework that consists of:

 • Written policies and procedures.

 • Division of responsibilities to ensure appropriate segregation of 

duties.

 • Careful selection of high calibre well qualified staff.

Technology One undertakes Internal Audits in accordance with the 
Internal Audit schedule as approved by the Audit and Risk Committee.  
These audits are undertaken by the Governance, Risk and Compliance 
Team and reported directly through to the Audit and Risk Committee. 
The company’s auditors or another suitable external independent 
organisation are engaged yearly to review the company’s internal 
controls and compliance and to provide a report to the Board. 

The Audit and Risk Committee also oversee the Company’s 
compliance program with relevant international standards (including 
ISO 9000, 27000 series, SOC 1, 2 and 3).

Remuneration Principles
Technology One believes in the full disclosure of remuneration of its 
Directors and Executives to the market, on at least an annual basis 
and as they occur in the case of new employment agreements. 
Disclosure will cover all monetary and non-monetary components 
including salary, fees, non-cash benefits, bonuses accruing each year 
irrespective of payment, profit share accruing each year irrespective 
of payment, superannuation contributions, payments entitled to 
termination or retirement, value of shares or options issued, sign-on 
payments etc.

As a matter of principle, Technology One has adopted the following 
guidelines to motivate Directors and Executives to pursue long-term 
growth, and ensure their interests and those of the shareholders are 
closely aligned:

 • Remuneration packages should be set in the context of what is 

reasonable and fair, taking into account the Company’s legal and 
industrial obligations, labour market conditions, the scale of the 
business and competitive forces.

 • Non-Executive Directors should be remunerated solely on the 
basis of a cash payment, plus superannuation contributions as 
required by law. Non-Executive Directors should not be provided 
with bonuses, options, shares, loans or any other non-cash 
component. They should not participate in schemes designed for 
the remuneration of Executives. The Company does not provide a 
Director’s Retirement Plan.

 • Non-Executive Directors will not be provided termination or 
retirement payments other than statutory superannuation.

 • Company Executives (including Executive Directors) should be 

provided with a significant component of their expected salary on 
“an at-risk basis”, tied to the Company’s profit target. Shares or 
Options may also be provided as part of the “at risk component”, 
but these must be tied to performance hurdles. The performance 
hurdles are to be reasonable, objective and measurable.

 • Termination payments should be agreed in writing and in advance 

if any are to be provided.

104

105

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleIndependent Chairman (Refer 
ASX Corporate Guidelines – 
Recommendation 2.5)
The Board is of the opinion it should maximise the vision, skills and 
deep industry knowledge of the Company’s founder and major 
shareholder, Mr Di Marco, to continue to lead the Company forward. 
He has a long and proven track record of creating significant 
shareholder wealth for the Company as its Chairman, since listing on 
the ASX in 1999.

The Board believes Mr Di Marco continues to be the best candidate 
to clearly communicate the Company’s vision, strategy and to set 
market expectations. To this end it is seen as appropriate that Mr Di 
Marco should remain as Executive Chairman of the Company. There 
is no empirical evidence to support the preference of an Independent 
Chairman. 

The ASX Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations 
propose that “if the Chair is not an independent Director, a listed 
entity should consider the appointment of an independent director 
as the Deputy Chair”.  Mr McLean was appointed Deputy Chair at the 
Board meeting held 15 August 2017. Mr McLean is deemed to be an 
independent non-executive director in the Board’s opinion.

The Company will appoint a Lead Independent Director in the next 
12 months once the new, independent non-executive Directors have 
been appointed and established in their roles.

On 23 May 2017, Mr Edward Chung was appointed as Chief Executive 
Officer.  

Mr Di Marco is not deemed independent under the ASX guidelines 
due to him being a substantial shareholder. This, however, aligns  
Mr Di Marco with the interests of the Company’s shareholders.

Performance Evaluation

Board

The Board meets annually for the purpose of reviewing and 
evaluating the performance of the Board as a whole, each Committee, 
key Executives and each Director individually in meeting key 
responsibilities and achieving its objectives. 

The following areas were considered by the Board in its 2020 annual 
review:

 • Performance evaluation of Directors and Senior Executives.

 • Review of skills and experience of the Board for current 

operations of the Company and identification of any shortfalls.

 • Director succession planning.

 • Review of current legislation in relation to any age restrictions. 

 • Review of independence of each Director.

 • Review of skills matrix to ensure relevance of required skills.

To assist the Board in maximising its effectiveness, the Board and 
Nomination and Governance Committee have a skills matrix to provide 
objective information about each Director and the Board as a whole 
during the past year. 

Each Director is encouraged to discuss any issue concerning Board 
performance with the Chairman at any time.

Directors are encouraged to maintain and improve their knowledge, 
skills and expertise through briefings, seminars and going professional 
development programs.

Remuneration of the Board is assessed every three (3) years against 
comparative data for Australian publicly listed companies supplied 
by an independent consultant and reported to the Remuneration 
Committee. The relative risk, time, effort, complexity of the 
underlying business, competency of the management team, financial 
performance and track record, clarity of strategy as well as the number 
of Board meeting required to oversee the business are used as 
benchmarks to determine the appropriate level of Director’s fees. For 
years where a formal assessment of remuneration is not conducted, 
the Director’s fees are increased by the Australian Consumer Price 
Index (CPI).

Senior Executives 

The performance of Senior Executives is reviewed and evaluated 
annually by a combination of the Company’s internal performance 
management program managed by the Company’s human resources 
department and as part of the formal remuneration review that is 
conducted annually by the Remuneration Committee.

Trading in Company Securities
The Directors have resolved to adopt the following policy in relation to 
trading by Directors and Officers in the Company’s shares.

 • The Directors and Officers will not engage in short term trading of 

the Company’s shares.

 • The Directors and Officers will not buy or sell shares at a time 

when they possess information which, if disclosed publicly, would 
be likely to materially affect the market price of the Company’s 

shares. Information is not considered to be generally available 
until a reasonable time has elapsed to allow the market to absorb 
these announcements.

The Directors and Officers are not permitted to use the Company’s 
shares as security for Margin Loans. To assist Directors and officers in 
abiding by these principles the following rules have been established, 
relating to when Directors and Officers can buy and sell the 
Company’s shares:

 • By the Annual Report being distributed to all shareholders.  
The Board ensures the Annual Report contains all relevant 
information about the operations of the Company during the 
financial year, together with details of future developments and 
other disclosures required under the Corporations Act 2001.

 • By publishing its Notice of Meetings and Explanatory 

Memorandum for each Annual General Meeting or other such 
meetings as required from time to time; 

 • For 50 days from the day following the release of the following 

 • By encouraging shareholders to attend and participate in the 

information to the market:

-  the half yearly financial statement

-  the annual financial statement

-  other reports relating to the financial performance or financial 

status of the Company.

At all times, the Director/Officer must notify the Board (as a minimum 
the Chairman) in advance of any intended transactions involving the 
Company’s shares. It is recognised that there may be circumstances 
where it may not be appropriate for Directors and Executives to buy 
and sell within the above 50 day window in the event the Company 
is involved in strategic initiatives (such as acquisitions), which could 
materially affect the market price of the Company’s shares.

The Directors and Executives must advise the Company Secretary of 
any completed trades immediately and definitely no later than one 
day after each transaction. This will allow the Company Secretary 
sufficient time to notify the ASX of the change in shareholding within 
the required period.

A register of Director’s holdings is made available for inspection at 
every Board meeting.

This policy applies to Directors and Executives (including their 
nominee companies) and the entities which they control.

For the purpose of this Policy, Executive is deemed to include the 
following parties:

a) persons named by the Board from time to time who may be 

involved in strategic issues

b) Executive officers of the Company as defined in section 9 of the 

Corporations Act being: ‘any person by whatever name called who 
is concerned or takes part in the management’

c) any member of the Company’s Executive committee.

In addition to the policy for Directors and Executives, all employees 
are reminded of the Insider Trading provisions of the Corporations Act. 
Staff are reminded of their obligations during the Trading Windows. 

Shareholders’ Rights  
and Communication
The Board of Directors aim to ensure that shareholders are informed 
of all major developments affecting the Company’s state of affairs.  
The information is communicated to shareholders, and forms part of 
the company’s two-way investor relations program:

 • By ensuring that all shareholders can elect to receive information 
and communications from the Company’s share registry either 
physically or electronically and can update their preferences 
through the share registry.

Company’s Annual General Meeting;

 • By encouraging shareholders to participate in proxy voting should 
they be unable to attend the Company’s Annual General Meeting;

 • By enabling shareholders to pose questions to the Company in 

the lead up to the Annual General Meeting for responding during 
the meeting;

 • By facilitating polls for each resolution voted during an AGM; 

 • By the Half Year results released to the market;

 • By disclosures forwarded to the ASX under the Company’s 

continuous disclosure obligations;

 • Through the Company’s website, under a special area called 

Shareholders;

 • By the Company’s participation in scheduled briefings with 

institutional shareholders and security analysts;

 • By the participation of the Company’s Auditors and Solicitors at 

the Annual General Meeting.

All information communicated by the Company is in accordance with 
its continuous disclosure requirements under ASX Listing Rule 3.1.

Non-Compliance with ASX 
Corporate Governance Principles 
and Recommendations 4th Edition

The Board of Technology One believes in working to the highest 
standards of Corporate Governance. Notwithstanding this, the Board 
believes it is important to recognise there is not a ‘one size fits all’ to 
good corporate governance, and that it is important to consider the 
size of the Company, the industry it operates within, the corporate 
history and the Company’s inherent strengths. 

The ASX Corporate Governance Council has recognised this fact and 
has allowed companies to explain where they do not comply with the 
Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations 4th  Edition.

The Company has complied with the majority of recommendations, 
with the exception of the following. The Board believes the areas of 
non-conformance shown below will not impact the Company’s ability 
to meet the highest standards of Corporate Governance and will at the 
same time allow the Company to capitalise on its inherent strengths.

This section highlights those areas of non-compliance and explains 
why it is appropriate.

106

107

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleVoluntary Tax Transparency Report

Financial Statements
Consolidated income statement

For the year ended 30 September 2020

TechnologyOne has a strong commitment to transparency and 
compliance.  TechnologyOne supports the objectives of the 
Government and the Board of Taxation to provide stakeholders with 
additional information and confidence that a company is compliant 
with their statutory obligations. 

The information provided complies with the standard of disclosure 
expected of ‘large businesses’ under the Voluntary Tax Transparency 
Code.  

The requirements of the Code are broken into Part A, which forms part 
of the tax notes as referenced below and Part B as disclosed below.  
The make-up of the respective parts is as follows:

(i) Part A:

 • Effective company tax rates for our Australian and global 

operations (Note 7). The effective tax rate of the Australian  
Group for FY20 is 24.9%

 • A reconciliation of accounting profit to tax expense and to income 

tax payable (Note 7)

 • Identification of material temporary and non-temporary differences 

(Note 7)

(ii) Part B

 • Tax policy, tax strategy and governance 

 • Information about international related party dealings 

 • A tax contribution summary of income tax paid.

Information in relation to the year ended 30 September 2020 is set 
out below.   

Our Approach to Tax 
TechnologyOne has a tax governance framework which has been 
approved by the Board. Tax falls under the oversight of the Audit  
and Risk Committee.   

Tax is one of a broad range of commercial factors taken into account 
when assessing and undertaking investment activities.  

TechnologyOne is conservative in its approach to tax risk. 
TechnologyOne aims to achieve full compliance with tax obligations 
in each tax jurisdiction in which it operates. In accordance with its 
commitment to best practice corporate governance and a culture of 
excellence, TechnologyOne will not enter into any arrangements that 
may be regarded as tax evasion. 

The Tax Risk Governance Policy includes a framework for the internal 
escalation process for referring matters to the CFO. The CFO must 
report any material tax issues to the Board. TechnologyOne will not 
pursue aggressive tax positions or strategies or adopt positions that 
are not able to be supported or defended in a court of law. Where the 
tax law is unclear or subject to interpretation, advice is obtained and 
when necessary the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) (or other relevant 
tax authority) is consulted to ensure certainty. 

TechnologyOne has a strong history of compliance and an open 
engagement with relevant tax authorities. We seek to be co-operative 
and transparent and to maintain collaborative relationships. 

International related party dealings 
TechnologyOne seeks to ensure all intercompany transactions are 
undertaken in accordance with the arm’s length principle.  

TechnologyOne has entered an Advanced Pricing Arrangements  
(APA) with the Australian Taxation Office. 

As an Australian headquartered company, we have created and 
maintained significant intellectual property in Australia which has  
been successfully utilised in our overseas operations. Our 
engagement with the ATO through the APA process, seeks to  
ensure Australia receives a commercial return for the use of 
intellectual property by our overseas businesses. These returns  
are taxable in Australia. 

In addition, loans are made to and received from foreign controlled 
entities for short term, medium term and long-term funding 
requirements. As a large global group, these transactions assist with 
managing cash flow and funding requirements.  

Tax Contribution Summary
Below is a summary of the taxes paid, collected and remitted by 
TechnologyOne to the relevant revenue authorities during the financial 
year ended 30 September 2020.

Year ended 30 September 2020

Corporate income taxes

Fringe benefits taxes

Payroll taxes

Net GST/VAT tax

Employee taxes remitted

TOTAL

Consolidated Global 
Group AUD

13,307,721.93

1,033,387.80

4,160,765.35

28,271,317.77

48,910,243.24

95,683,436.09

Revenue - SaaS and continuing business

Revenue - Legacy licence business

Revenue from contracts with customers

Variable costs

Variable customer cloud costs

Total variable costs

Occupancy costs

Corporate costs

Depreciation and amortisation

Computer and communication costs

Marketing costs

Employee costs

Share-based payments

Finance expense

Total operating costs

Other income

Profit before income tax

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Notes

5

6

6

6

6

5(a)

7

30

30

The above consolidated income statement should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

For the year ended 30 September 2020

Profit for the year (from above)

Other comprehensive income

Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the year

2020
$’000

269,774

28,493

298,267

(19,130)

(19,479)

(38,609)

(3,259)

(18,312)

(18,638)

(8,019)

(5,296)

(119,615)

(3,305)

(1,495)

(177,939)

751

82,470

(19,525)

62,945

2019
$’000

241,790

43,204

284,994

(19,708)

(16,965)

(36,673)

(10,808)

(17,285)

(6,127)

(9,024)

(6,252)

(121,840)

(2,018)

(24)

(173,378)

1,446

76,389

(17,930)

58,459

Cents

Cents

                19.75 

                18.43 

                19.61 

                18.30 

2020
$’000

62,945

286

286

63,231

2019
$’000

58,459

1,199

1,199

59,658

108

109

The above consolidated statement of comprehensive income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position

as at 30 September 2020

Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

For the year ended 30 September 2020

ASSETS

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Prepayments

Trade and other receivables

Contract assets

Other current assets

Current tax assets

Contract acquisition costs 

Total current assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Intangible assets

Capitalised development

Deferred tax assets

Contract acquisition costs

Total non-current assets

Total assets

LIABILITIES

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Prepaid subscription revenue

Lease liability

Borrowings

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Provisions

Other non-current liabilities

Lease liability

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

EQUITY

Contributed equity

Other reserves

Retained earnings

Total equity

Notes

8

9

10

11

13

12

19

13

13

14

13

15

17

16

19

18

19

21

22

2020
$’000

125,244

10,851

37,396

22,051

397

8,077

2,956

2019
$’000

105,046

12,810

49,032

24,607

463

6,783

2,104

206,972

200,845

8,969

23,786

37,986

62,556

28,605

7,035

168,937

375,909

37,123

20,548

144,148

2,148

-

10,900

-

37,521

31,590

32,153

5,415

117,579

318,424

45,690

13,861

147,558

-

5

203,967

207,114

2,430

147

27,197

29,774

233,741

142,168

40,551

63,524

38,093

142,168

3,616

837

-

4,453

211,567

106,857

35,302

55,477

16,078

106,857

Notes

1(a)

23

21

31

Balance at 1 October 2019

AASB 16 opening adjustment

Adjusted opening balance

Exchange differences on translation of foreign 
operations

Profit for the period

Total comprehensive income for the period

Transfer to dividend reserve

Dividends paid

Exercise of share options

Share based payments

Tax impact of share trust

Balance at 30 September 2020

Contributed 
equity
$’000

Retained 
earnings1
$’000

Dividend reserve
$’000

FOREX  
reserve
$’000

Share option 
reserve
$’000

Total  
equity
$’000

35,302

-

35,302

-

-

-

-

-

5,249

-

-

5,249

40,551

16,078

199

16,277

-

62,945

62,945

(41,129)

-

-

-

-

27,905

-

27,905

-

-

-

41,129

(38,988)

-

-

-

(41,129)

38,093

2,141

30,046

1,850

-

1,850

286

-

286

-

-

-

-

-

-

25,722

106,857

-

199

25,722

107,056

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,305

2,315

5,620

286

62,945

63,231

-

(38,988)

5,249

3,305

2,315

(28,119)

142,168

2,136

31,342

Balance at 1 October 2018

33,171

12,758

8,616

Exchange differences on translation of foreign 
operations

Profit for the period

Total comprehensive income for the period

Transfer to dividend reserve

Dividends paid

Exercise of share options

Share-based payments

Tax impact of share trust

Balance at 30 September 2018

-

-

-

-

-

2,131

-

-

2,131

35,302

-

58,459

58,459

(55,139)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

55,139

(35,850)

-

-

-

(55,139)

16,078

19,289

27,905

23

21

31

651

1,199

-

1,199

-

-

-

-

-

-

22,294

77,490

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,947

1,481

3,428

1,199

58,459

59,658

-

(35,850)

2,131

1,947

1,481

(30,291)

1,850

25,722

106,857

1Refer to note 1(a) for details regarding the application of the new accounting policy AASB 16 Leases. 

The above consolidated statement of changes in equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

The above consolidated statement of financial position should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

110

111

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows

For the year ended 30 September 2020

Cash flows from operating activities

Receipts from customers (inclusive of GST)

Payments to suppliers and employees (inclusive of GST)

Interest received

Income taxes paid

Interest paid1

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Payments of contingent consideration

Payments for property, plant and equipment

Payments for intangible assets

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from exercise of share options

Payments for principal repayments of lease liabilities1

Dividends paid to shareholders

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from financing activities

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the financial year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

1Refer to note 1(a) for details regarding the application of the new accounting policy AASB 16 Leases.

Notes

19

29

19

23

8

2020
$’000

340,405

(222,036)

353

(13,716)

(1,495)

103,511

(223)

(1,979)

(42,859)

(45,061)

5,248

(4,512)

(38,988)

(38,252)

20,198

105,046

125,244

2019
$’000

310,883

(223,124)

634

(11,534)

(24)

76,835

(4,059)

(2,350)

(35,927)

(42,336)

2,075

-

(35,850)

(33,775)

724

104,322

105,046

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

1. 

Summary of significant  
accounting policies

The financial report of Technology One Limited (the Company) for 
the year ended 30 September 2020 was authorised for issue in 
accordance with a resolution of Directors on 24 November 2020.

Technology One Limited (the Company) is a company limited by 
shares incorporated in Australia whose shares are publicly traded on 
the Australian Securities Exchange.

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these 
financial statements are set out below. These policies have been 
consistently applied to all the periods presented, unless otherwise 
stated. The financial statements are for the consolidated entity 
consisting of Technology One Limited and its subsidiaries. The nature 
of the operations and principal activities of the Group are described in 
the Directors' report.

(a) Basis of preparation

The financial report is a general purpose financial report prepared by 
a for profit entity, which has been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Corporations Act 2001, Australian Accounting 
Standards and other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian 
Accounting Standards Board.

The financial report is presented in Australian dollars and all values 
are rounded to the nearest thousand dollars ($000) unless otherwise 
stated.

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the 
previous financial year except where a change has been required due 
to the implementation of a new accounting standard.

Certain comparative items have been reclassified in the financial 
statements to align with the 30 September 2020 year end disclosures. 

i. 

 Compliance with IFRS

This financial report also complies with International Financial 

Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International 

Accounting Standards Board.

as at 1 October 2019. The weighted average incremental borrowing 
rate applied was 4.78%. The right of use asset has been measured 
either retrospectively as if the new standard has always been in place 
or at an amount equal to the lease liability on transition, adjusted by 
the amount of any prepaid or accrued lease payments relating to that 
lease recognised in the balance sheet as at 30 September 2019. 

The profile of the lease related expense has changed from being 
included within the occupancy costs line of the consolidated income 
statement as a rent expense to being made up of a depreciation 
expense on the right-of-use asset and an interest expense on the 
lease liability. Due to the transition option selected by the Group, the 
occupancy costs line in the consolidated income statement is lower 
than the prior corresponding period and the depreciation and finance 
expense lines are higher than the prior corresponding period. 

(i) Practical expedients applied

In applying AASB 16 for the first time, the Group has used the following 
practical expedients permitted by the standard:

 • relying on previous assessments on whether leases are onerous 
applying AASB 137 as an alternative to performing an impairment 
review – there were no onerous contracts as at 1 October 2019

 • accounting for leases with a remaining lease term of less than 12 

months as at 1 October 2019 as short-term leases

 • making use of the recognition exemption for leases for which the 

underlying asset is of low value

 • excluding initial direct costs for the measurement of the right-of-

use asset at the date of initial application, and

 • using hindsight in determining the lease term where the contract 

contains options to extend or terminate the lease.

 • The Group has also elected not to reassess whether a contract 

is, or contains a lease at the date of initial application. Instead, for 
contracts entered into before the transition date the Group relied 
on its assessment made applying AASB 117 and Interpretation 
4 determining whether an arrangement contains a Lease. The 
types of leases relevant to the Group are property and equipment 
leases. 

ii.  New accounting standards and interpretations

(ii) Measurement of lease liabilities

The above consolidated statement of cash flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

AASB 16 Leases – Impact of adoption

AASB 16 Leases replaces AASB 117 Leases and is effective for the 
Group for the current financial year beginning 1 October 2019. The 
Group has adopted AASB 16 under the modified retrospective 
approach and therefore comparatives of the 2020 reporting period 
have not been restated. Accordingly, there is an adjustment to 
opening retained earnings at 1 October 2019.

The standard introduces a single lessee accounting model and 
requires a lessee to recognise assets and liabilities for all leases with 
a term of more than 12 months unless the underlying asset is of low 
value. The standard removes the classification of leases as either 
operating or finance leases for the lessee and effectively treats all 
leases as finance leases. 

Under the new standard a lease liability has been recognised, 
representing the Group’s obligation to make lease payments and a 
corresponding right of use asset has been recognised, representing 
the lessee’s right to use the underlying leased asset.

The below is a reconciliation between the operating lease 
commitment disclosed in the Group financial statements for the year 
ended 30 September 2019 to the opening lease liability balance 
recognised at 1 October 2019.

Operating lease commitment at 30 September 2019 as disclosed in 
the Group's consolidated financial statements

Discounted using the weighted average incremental borrowing rate at 
1 October 2019

Reconciling items

(Less) short-term leases recognised on a straight-line basis as an 
expense

Add/(less) adjustment as a result of a different treatment of extension 
and termination options

112

The lease liability has been measured as the present value of future 
lease payments discounted at the lessees incremental borrowing rate 

Lease Liabilities recognised as at 1 October 2019

1 October 2019
$'000

41,648

35,708

(156)

(2,735)

32,817

113

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or 
complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant 
to the financial statements, are disclosed in note 3.

 • All resulting exchange differences are recognised in other 

comprehensive income

Revenue from these services is recognised as services are rendered, 
typically in accordance with the achievement of contract milestones 
and/or hours expended.

Of which are:

Current lease liabilities

Non-current lease liabilities

5,688

27,129

(iii) Measurement of right-of-use assets

On transition the associated right-of-use assets were measured 
either retrospectively as if the new rules had always been applied, as 
was done for the Group’s largest lease (HQ), or at an amount equal 
to the lease liability on transition, adjusted by the amount of any 
prepaid or accrued lease payments relating to that lease recognised 
in the balance sheet as at 30 September 2019. This choice in the 
measurement of the right of use asset on transition to AASB 16 is 
allowable within the standard on a lease by lease basis under the 
modified retrospective approach.

(iv) Adjustments recognised in the statement of financial  
position at 1 October 2019

The change in accounting policy affected the following balance sheet 
items as at 1 October 2019: 

Statement of financial 
position increase/
(decrease)

Assets

30 September 
2019
AASB 117 reported
($000s)

Opening balance 
adjustment 
($000s)

1 October 2019
AASB 16 restated
($000s)

Right-of-use assets 

-

28,686

12,810

32,153

-

-

47,290

837

(610)

1,239

5,688

27,129

(3,041)

(660)

28,686

12,200

33,392

5,688

27,129

44,249

177

Prepayments

Deferred tax (net)

Liabilities

Lease liability- current

Lease liability- non current

Trade and other payables

Other non-current liabilities

Equity

Equity

(b) Principles of consolidation

(i) Subsidiaries

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets and 
liabilities of all subsidiaries of Technology One Limited ('Company' 
or 'parent entity') as at 30 September 2020 and the results of all 
subsidiaries for the year then ended. Technology One Limited and 
its subsidiaries together are referred to in this financial report as the 
'Group' or the 'Consolidated entity'.

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on 
transactions between companies are eliminated. Unrealised losses 
are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence 
of the impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies 
of subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure 
consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.

(ii) Employee Share Trust

The Group has formed a trust to administer the Group's employee 
share scheme. This trust is consolidated, as the substance of 
the relationship is that the trust is controlled by the Group. At 30 
September 2020, the Group had 61,173 treasury shares (2019: 116,630). 

Treasury shares are shares in the Group that are held by the 
Employee Share Trust for the purpose of issuing shares under the 
TechnologyOne employee share scheme. 

(c) Foreign currency translation

(i) Functional and presentation currency

Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group's 
operations are measured using the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the entity operates ('the functional currency'). 
The consolidated financial statements are presented in Australian 
dollars, which is Technology One Limited's functional and presentation 
currency.

106,857

199

107,056

(ii) Transactions and balances

(v) New Group accounting policy - AASB 16 Leases 

The accounting policy for leases has been set out below in section 
(g). 

Interpretation 23 – Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments

AASB Interpretation 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments 
also became effective for the group from 1 October 2019. The 
interpretation clarifies how to recognise and measure deferred and 
current income tax assets and liabilities where there is uncertainty 
over a tax treatment. This has not had a material impact on the Group.

(vi) Issued but not yet effective

No new standards have been issued that are not in effect for the 
Group. 

(vii) Critical accounting estimates

The preparation of financial statements requires the use of certain 
critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise 
its judgement in the process of applying the Group's accounting 

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional 
currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the 
transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the 
settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end 
exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in 
foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement.

(iii) Group companies

The results and financial position of foreign operations (none of 
which has the currency of a hyperinflationary economy) that have 
a functional currency different from the presentation currency are 
translated into the presentation currency as follows:

 • Assets and liabilities for each statement of financial position 

presented are translated at the closing rate at the date of that 
statement of financial position

 • Income and expenses for each income statement and statement 
of comprehensive income are translated at average exchange 
rates (unless this is not a reasonable approximation of the 
cumulative effect of the rates prevailing on the transaction dates, 
in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of 
the transactions)

(d) Revenue recognition

The Group has the following key revenue categories:

4. Initial license fees

1.  SaaS Fees

2. Annual Licence fees

3. Consulting Services

4. Initial Licence Fees

The accounting policies for each of these categories has been set  
out below: 

Revenue categories

1. SaaS Fees

Revenue from term SaaS contracts are recognised on a daily basis 
over the term of the contract. Included within this category is revenue 
from contracts for annual SaaS licences as well as Platform services 
associated with initial licence fees. The Group considers that SaaS 
licence contracts represent a right to access the Group’s licenced 
intellectual property and as such the performance obligation is fulfilled 
over the contract term. 

Payment terms in respect of SaaS Fees are typically annual within 
14 to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade 
receivables. 

Unsatisfied performance obligations in respect of SaaS Fees received 
or receivable are recognised as prepaid subscription revenue in 
the consolidated statement of financial position. Refer to note 16 for 
details of prepaid subscription revenue. 

Costs incurred in obtaining the customer contract are expensed, 
unless they are incremental to obtaining the contract and the 
Group expects to recover those costs. Costs that meet the criteria 
for capitalisation will be amortised over the life of the contract that 
they relate to. The Group has identified certain commission costs as 
meeting the criteria of directly related contract costs. These costs are 
capitalised in the month in which they are incurred and amortised 
over an average contract term of 5 years. The movement in the year 
and the closing balance of this asset is disclosed within note 13 as 
‘contract acquisition costs’. This balance is presented as ‘contract 
acquisition costs’ in the statement of financial position. 

2. Annual license fees

Annual Licence Fees are recognised on a daily basis over the term of 
the contract. The Group considers that the performance obligation in 
respect of these services is satisfied over time.

Payment terms in respect of Annual Licence Fees are typically annual 
within 14 to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade 
receivables until paid.

Unsatisfied performance obligations in respect of Annual Licence fees 
are disclosed as prepaid subscription revenue in the consolidated 
statement of financial position.  Refer to note 16 for details of prepaid 
subscription revenue. 

3. Consulting services

Consulting services includes services for licenced software and 
project services revenue.

Initial Licence Fees are recognised on provision of the software.  
The Group considers that such contracts represent a right to use the 
Group’s licenced intellectual property and as such the performance 
obligation is fulfilled at the point in time at which the customer 
receives the licence key. 

Payment terms in respect of Initial Licence Fees are typically within 
14 to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade 
receivables.

As the performance obligation is satisfied at a point in time (i.e. at 
contract delivery), there are no unsatisfied performance obligations in 
respect of Initial Licence Fees.

The Group considers the effects of variable consideration, reviews 
the contracts to identify if a significant financing component exists 
and considers the standalone pricing of the initial licence fees when 
allocating the transaction price of the contract to the performance 
obligation.

Associated contract balances

Under AASB 15, the timing of revenue recognition, customer invoicing 
and cash collections results in the recognition of trade receivables, 
contract asset and prepaid subscription revenue (contract liability) 
on the Group’s Consolidated statement of financial position. At 30 
September 2020, the statement of financial position shows a current 
liability balance of $204m (30 September 2019: $207m) which is 
attributable to the prepaid subscription revenue balance in current 
liabilities. As prepaid subscription revenue represents payments 
received or receivable in advance from customers for SaaS Fees and 
Annual Licence Fees which will be recognised in future periods, and 
not a future cash outflow, this balance does not impact the Group’s 
ability to meet its short-term obligations as and when they fall due.

Revenue Groups disclosed in the consolidated income 
statement

 The Group has the following revenue groups:

1. Revenue – SaaS and continuing business

The Group defines continuing business as those revenue streams that 
form part of our growth strategy. Namely this includes SaaS, annual 
licence fees and consulting services. 

2. Revenue – Legacy licence business

The legacy licence fee business encompasses the sale of initial 
licences which will continue to decline as our customers transition to 
SaaS, growing the SaaS and continuing business revenue. Included 
within this revenue group is annual licence fees recognised from the 
date the associated initial licence is delivered until the end of the first 
financial year post signing.

(e) Income tax

The income tax expense or benefit for the period is the tax payable 
on the current period's taxable income based on the applicable 
income tax rate for each jurisdiction adjusted by changes in deferred 
tax assets and liabilities attributable to temporary differences and to 
unused tax losses.

114

115

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
The current income tax charge is calculated on the basis of the tax 
laws enacted or substantively enacted at the end of the reporting 
period in the countries where the Group's subsidiaries operate 
and generate taxable income. Management periodically evaluates 
positions taken in tax returns with respect to situations in which 
applicable tax regulation is subject to interpretation. It establishes 
provisions where appropriate on the basis of amounts expected to be 
paid to the tax authorities.

Deferred income tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial 
statements. However, the deferred income tax is not accounted for if 
it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction 
other than a business combination that at the time of the transaction 
affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred income 
tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted 
or substantially enacted by the end of the reporting period and are 
expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is 
realised or the deferred income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary 
differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future 
taxable amounts will be available to utilise those temporary 
differences and losses.

Deferred tax liabilities and assets are not recognised for temporary 
differences between the carrying amount and tax bases of 
investments in foreign operations where the Group is able to control 
the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is 
probable that the differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally 
enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities and when 
the deferred tax balances relate to the same taxation authority. 
Current tax assets and tax liabilities are offset where the entity has a 
legally enforceable right to offset and intends either to settle on a net 
basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

The carrying amount of deferred income tax assets is reviewed at 
each reporting date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or 
part of the deferred income tax asset to be utilised.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax 
rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realised 
or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date.

Technology One Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled 
entities have implemented the tax consolidation legislation. As a 
consequence, these entities are taxed as a single entity and the 
deferred tax assets and liabilities of these entities are set off in the 
consolidated financial statements.

The head entity, Technology One Limited, and the controlled entities in 
the tax consolidated group account for their own current and deferred 
tax amounts. These tax amounts are measured as if each entity in the 
tax consolidated group continues to be a stand-alone taxpayer in its 
own right.

The Group has applied the Group allocation approach in determining 
the appropriate amount of current taxes and deferred taxes to allocate 
to members of the tax consolidated group. The current and deferred 
tax amounts are measured in a systematic manner that is consistent 
with the broad principles in AASB 112.

The Group created an Employee Share Trust during 2009 which 
allows an employee on the exercise of an option to hold the share 
in the Trust. As per AASB 112, on granting the option, the Group now 

(i) Impairment of assets

Goodwill and intangible assets that have an indefinite useful life are 
not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment, 
or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that they might be impaired. Other assets are tested for impairment 
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is 
recognised for the amount by which the asset's carrying amount 
exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the 
higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and value-in-use. For 
the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the 
lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows 
which are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets 
or groups of assets (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other 
than goodwill that suffered an impairment are reviewed for possible 
reversal of the impairment at the end of each reporting period.

(j) Financial assets and liabilities

Financial instruments recognised in the statement of financial position 
include; cash and cash equivalents, trade receivables, contract assets, 
trade payables and contingent consideration.

(i) Classification

The Group classifies its financial assets and financial liabilities into the 
following measurement categories;

 • those to be measured at amortised cost (using the effective 

interest method) and;

 • those to be measured at fair value with changes through the profit 

or loss (FVPL). 

Classification into these categories is based on an assessment of the 
Groups’ business model for managing its financial instruments and the 
contractual terms of the cash flows. 

(ii) Measurement

Amortised cost

Under this method the financial instrument is measured at the amount 
recognised at initial recognition minus principal repayments. Further 
adjustments to the carrying value of the financial instrument will 
arise if there is a modification to the contractual cash flows creating 
a gain/loss in the measurement or if there is no longer a reasonable 
expectation of recovery of a financial asset resulting in a write off. 

records a deferred tax asset on the expected value of the share. If 
the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) 
exceeds the amount of the related cumulative remuneration expense, 
the difference is recognised directly in equity. When the employee 
exercises the option, the tax effect difference between the actual 
market value and what was recorded as a deferred tax asset is 
recognised in equity.

Uncertain tax positions addressed by IFRS Interpretation 23 
Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatment are disclosed in Note 1(a)(v). 

(f) Segment reporting

An operating segment is a component of an entity that engages 
in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses (including revenues and expenses relating to transactions 
with other components of the same entity), whose operating results 
are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision maker 
to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and 
assess its performance and for which discrete financial information is 
available.

Operating segments have been identified based on the information 
provided to the chief operating decision maker - being the Chief 
Executive Officer.

Operating segments that meet the quantitative criteria as prescribed 
by AASB 8 are reported separately. However, an operating segment 
that does not meet the quantitative criteria is still reported separately 
where information about the segment would be useful to users of the 
financial statements.

The lease payments above are discounted using the interest rate 
implicit in the lease if that rate is readily determinable. This is not 
the case for the Group’s current leases. When the interest rate 
implicit in the lease is not readily determinable AASB 16 requires the 
use of the incremental borrowing rate to calculate the present value 
of the lease payments. This rate is the rate of interest that a lessee 
would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to purchase the 
right of use asset, over a similar term and with a similar security, in 
similar economic environment.

The most appropriate rate to use as a starting point in determining 
the incremental borrowing rate would be the interest rate incurred 
on existing borrowings. However, the Group does not have any 
existing borrowings. In the absence of this the Group uses the 
swap curve with a corresponding rating as the starting point 
in determining the incremental borrowing rate. In line with the 
accounting standard the Group adjusts the swap curve rate for the 
term of the leases, the value of the leases and the creditworthiness 
of the Group. 

Once the lease liability has been recognised on the balance sheet 
the periodic lease repayments are allocated between an interest 
and a principal element. The interest is charged to profit or loss 
over the lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate 
of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. Variable lease 
payments that do not depend on an index or a rate are recognised 
as expenses in the period in which the event or condition that 
triggers the payment occurs.

(g) Leases

Right-of-use asset 

AASB 16 supersedes AASB 117 Leases and IFRIC 4 determining 
whether an arrangement contains a Lease. The standard sets out 
the principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and 
disclosure of leases and requires lessees to recognise most leases 
on the balance sheet.

The Group’s lease portfolio primarily consists of property leases. 
Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a 
range of different terms and conditions. 

Lease contracts may contain both lease and non-lease components. 
The Group allocates the consideration in the contract to the lease 
and non-lease components based on their relative stand-alone 
prices. 

Lease liability

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of 
outstanding lease payments (including those to be made under 
reasonably certain extension options). The payments used in this 
calculation include the following:

 • fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any 

lease incentives receivable

 • variable lease payment that are based on an index or a rate, 

initially measured using the index or rate as at the commencement 
date

 • amounts expected to be payable by the group under residual 

value guarantees 

 • the exercise price of a purchase option if the group is reasonably 

certain to exercise that option and 

 • payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term 

reflects the group exercisingthat option.

The right-of-use asset is initially calculated as being equal to the 
lease liability and then adjusted for the following:

 • Lease payments made on or before the commencement date less 

any incentives received

 • Any initial direct costs, and

 • An estimate of restoration costs.

This right-of-use asset is then depreciated on a straight-line basis 
over the calculated lease term.

Right-of-use assets are also subject to impairment testing under 
AASB 136 Impairment of assets. 

Short term and low value assets 

FVPL

The Group applies the short-term lease recognition exemption to 
its short-term leases (i.e., those leases that have a lease term of 12 
months or less from the commencement date and do not contain a 
purchase option). Payments associated with short-term leases and all 
leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as 
an expense in profit or loss.

(h) Variable costs

The components to variable costs are made up of:

-  Costs incurred in obtaining a licence fee contract. These are 

expensed as incurred.

-  Costs incurred in fulfilling the contract with a customer are 

capitalised if the requirements in AASB 15 are fulfilled and are then 
expensed in line with the satisfaction of the related performance 
obligation. 

The financial instrument is measured at fair value. Changes in fair 
value are recognised in profit and loss as they arise. 

(iii) Impairment

The Group recognises impairment losses on its financial assets using 
an expected credit losses (ECL) model in line with AASB 9 Financial 
Instruments. The ECL model essentially aims to calculate the assets 
credit risk. It involves consideration of scenarios that would lead to 
default, calculating the shortfall between what is contractually due and 
what would be received under each scenario and then multiplying the 
shortfall/loss by the probability of the default situation occurring.

The Group has elected to apply the AASB 9 simplified approach to 
measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected 
credit loss allowance for all trade receivables and contract assets. 
The Group has also made use of the practical expedient available for 
calculating expected credit losses for short term receivables.  

116

117

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleThis practical expedient involves using a “provision matrix” to 
calculate the loss allowance. This matrix is based on historical default 
rates over the expected life of the trade receivables and it is adjusted 
for forward-looking estimates.

A 6-month historical default rate is applied to the trade receivables 
balance to calculate the expected credit loss. This appears as a 
provision against the trade receivables balance. Movements in this 
provision are recognised as an expense in the consolidated income 
statement to the extent that the related revenue has been recognised 
in the consolidated income statement. If a receivable balance is 
identified as being unrecoverable it is written off against the allowance 
for expected credit losses. 

(k) Cash and cash equivalents

For the purpose of presentation in the statement of cash flows, cash 
and cash equivalents includes cash on hand, deposits held at call with 
financial institutions, other short-term, highly liquid investments with 
original maturities of three months or less that are readily convertible 
to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant 
risk of changes in value, and bank overdrafts. Cash and cash 
equivalents are presented in the consolidated statement of cash flows, 
net of outstanding bank overdrafts.

(l) Trade receivables

Trade receivables are recognised initially at transaction price and 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest 
method. Trade receivables are generally due for settlement within 14 
to 30 days.

The Group uses the simplified approach to measuring expected credit 
losses. The movement in the expected credit loss is recognised in the 
income statement within corporate expenses.

(m) Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated 
depreciation and any impairment in value. Depreciation is calculated 
on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful economic lives of the 

assets as follows:

Office furniture and equipment

Computer software

Motor vehicles

3-11 years

3-4 years

4-5 years

The assets' residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and 
adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period.

An asset's carrying amount is written down immediately to its 
recoverable amount if the asset's carrying amount is greater than its 
estimated recoverable amount (note 1(i)).

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds 
with carrying amount. These are included in the income statement.

(n) Intangible assets

(i) Goodwill

Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the 
fair value of the Group's share of the net identifiable assets of the 
acquired subsidiary/associate at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on 
acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill is 
not amortised. Instead, goodwill is tested for impairment annually, or 
more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it 
might be impaired and is carried at cost less accumulated impairment 

losses. Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the 
carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.

Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of 
impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating 
units or groups of cash-generating units that are expected to benefit 
from the business combination in which the goodwill arose (note 4).

(ii) Intellectual property/source code

Intangible assets acquired separately are capitalised at cost, and 
if acquired as a result of a business combination, capitalised at fair 
value as at the date of acquisition. Following initial recognition, the 
cost model is applied to all classes of intangible assets. The useful 
lives of the intangible assets are assessed to be either finite or 
indefinite. Where amortisation is charged on intangible assets with 
finite lives, this expense is taken to the Income Statement through 
the 'depreciation and amortisation expense' line item. Intangible 
assets with finite lives are tested for impairment where an indicator 
of impairment exists. Useful lives are examined on an annual basis 
and adjustments, where applicable, are made on a prospective basis.

Intellectual Property/Source Code is amortised on a straight line 
basis over 3-8 years.

Gains or losses arising from the de-recognition of an intangible asset 
are measured as the difference between the net disposal proceeds 
and the carrying amount of the asset and are recognised in the 
statement of comprehensive income when the intangible asset is 
derecognised.

(iii) Software development

Development is only to be capitalised if the recognition requirements 
have been fulfilled and a benefit of more than 12 months is expected. 

On transition to a SaaS company, which results in providing access 
to our products via a SaaS platform over a prolonged term, the 
technical feasibility of our products can be established at an earlier 
phase through pre-defined project roadmaps. Costs that are directly 
associated with the development of this software (largely CiAnywhere 
products) are recognised as an intangible asset where the following 

criteria are met:

a) The technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset so that   

it will be available for use or sale;

become available for use. At the point in which the products become 
available for use, the costs are transferred from “under development” 
to “in use” and amortised from that point (refer to categorisation in 
note 13). Research costs are expensed as incurred and are largely 
made up of employee labour which is included in employee costs in 
the consolidated income statement. Development costs previously 
recognised as expenses are not recognised as assets in a subsequent 
period.

(o) Trade and other payables

These amounts represent liabilities for goods and services provided 
to the Group prior to the end of financial year which are unpaid. 
The amounts are unsecured and are usually paid within 30 days of 
recognition.

(p) Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or 
constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the 
amount has been reliably estimated. Provisions are not recognised for 
future operating losses.

Provisions are measured at the present value of management's best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at 
the end of the reporting period. The discount rate used to determine 
the present value is a pre-tax rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the 
liability. The increase in the provision due to the passage of time is 
recognised as interest expense.

(q) Employee benefits

(i) Short-term obligations

Liabilities for wages and salaries, including non-monetary benefits 
and annual leave expected to be settled within 12 months after the 
end of the period in which the employees render the related service 
are recognised in respect of employees' services up to the end of the 
reporting period and are measured at the amounts expected to be 
paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities for sick leave, which are 
non-vesting, are recognised when the leave is taken and measured at 
the rates paid or payable.

b) Intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it;

(ii) Long service leave

c) Ability to use or sell the intangible asset;

d) How the intangible asset will generate probable economic 

benefits. Among other things, the entity can demonstrate the 
existence of a market for the output of the intangible asset or the 
intangible asset itself or, if it is to be used internally, the usefulness 
of the intangible asset;

e) The availability of adequate technical, financial and other 

resources to complete the development and to use or sell the 
intangible asset;

f)  Ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to the 

intangible asset during its development.

These costs include personnel and other directly attributable costs 
incurred in the development of software. Capitalised software 
development costs are recognised as an intangible asset and 
amortised over their estimated useful lives, which is considered to be 
from three to seven years. Software development costs are capitalised 
as “under development” until the products to which the costs relate 

The liability for long service leave is recognised in the provision for 
employee benefits and is measured as the present value of expected 
future payments to be made in respect of services provided by 
employees up to the reporting period. Consideration is given to 
expected future wage and salary levels, experience of employee 
departures and periods of service. Expected future payments are 
discounted using market yields at the end of the reporting period on 
national corporate bonds with terms to maturity and currency that 
match, as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows.

(iii) Share-based payments

The Group provides benefits to certain employees in the form of 
share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for rights over shares. The costs of share-based 
payment transactions with employees are measured by reference to 
the fair value of the equity instruments at the date at which they are 
granted. Refer to note 31.

The cost of share-based payments is recognised, together with 
a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the 

performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date 
on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award 
(the vesting period). In the case that the rights over shares do not vest 
at the end of the performance period, the corresponding expense in 
relation to those rights will be reversed. No expense is recognised for 
awards that do not ultimately vest.

(r) Contributed equity

Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Issued and paid up capital is recognised at the fair value of the 
consideration received. Any transaction costs arising on the issue of 
ordinary shares are recognised directly in equity as a reduction of the 
share proceeds received.

(s) Earnings per share

(i) Basic earnings per share

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing:

 • The profit attributable to owners of the Group, excluding any costs 

of servicing equity other than ordinary shares

 • By the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding 
during the year, adjusted for bonus elements in ordinary shares 
issued during the year and excluding treasury shares

(ii) Diluted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share adjusts the figures used in the 
determination of basic earnings per share to take into account:

 • The after income tax effect of interest and other financing costs 

associated with dilutive potential ordinary shares

 • The weighted average number of additional ordinary shares that 
would have been outstanding assuming the conversion of all 
dilutive potential ordinary shares

(t) Dividends

Provision is made for the amount of any dividend declared, being 
appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of the entity, 
on or before the end of the reporting period but not distributed at the 
end of the reporting period.

(u) Goods and services tax (GST) and equivalent 
overseas value added taxes

Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of 
associated GST, unless the GST incurred is not recoverable from the 
taxation authority. In this case it is recognised as part of the cost of 
acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense.

Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of the amount of GST 
receivable or payable. The net amount of GST recoverable from, or 
payable to, the taxation authority is included with other receivables or 
payables in the statement of financial position.

Cash flows are presented on a gross basis. The GST components 
of cash flows arising from investing or financing activities which are 
recoverable from, or payable to the taxation authority, are presented 
as operating cash flows.

118

119

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple(c) Credit risk

(e) Fair value measurements

(i) Impairment of goodwill and other assets

Financial risk management
2. 
Financial instruments recognised in the statement of financial position 
include; cash and cash equivalents, trade receivables, lease liabilities 
and trade payables.

It is, and has been throughout the period under review, the Group’s 
policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken. 
The main risks arising from the Group’s financial assets and liabilities 
are interest rate risk, foreign currency risk and credit risk. The Board 
reviews and agrees policies for managing each of these risks and they 
are summarised below.

Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, 
including the criteria for recognition, the basis of measurement and 
the basis on which income and expenses are recognised, in respect 
of each class of financial asset, financial liability and equity instrument 
are disclosed in Note 1 to the Financial Statements.

The Group holds the following financial instruments: 

The Group trades only with recognised, creditworthy third parties. It is 
the Group's policy that all customers who wish to trade on credit terms 
are subject to credit verification procedures. In addition, receivable 
balances are monitored on an ongoing basis with the result that the 
Group's expected credit loss is not significant. Information on credit 
risk exposures is contained in Note 9.

(d) Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk arises from the financial liabilities of the Group and the 
Group’s subsequent ability to meet their obligations to repay their 
financial liabilities as and when they fall due.

The below table represents the financial assets under note 2(c) and 
the liquidity risk of financial liabilities referred to in note 2(d).

Less than 
12 months
$’000

Between 
1 and 5 
years
$’000

Over 5 
years
$’000

Total
contractual
cash
flows
$’000

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

At 30 September 2020

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

125,244

105,046

Trade and other receivables

37,396

49,032

Total

162,640

154,078

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables 

37,123

37,123

45,467

Borrowings

Contingent consideration

-

-

29,345

5

223

-

Lease liabilities

2,341

28,508

3,566

Total

39,464

28,508

3,566

66,468

45,695

Net inflow / (outflow)

123,176

(28,508)

(3,566)

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Borrowings

Contingent consideration

Lease liability

(a) Interest rate risk

The Group’s cash and investment assets are exposed to 
movements in deposit and variable interest rates. The Group does 
not hedge this exposure. Interest rate risk on cash is not considered 
to be material.

(b) Foreign currency risk

As a result of operations in New Zealand, Malaysia, Papua New 
Guinea and the United Kingdom and sales contracts denominated 
in United States dollars, the Group's statement of financial position 
can be affected by movements in the exchange rates applicable to 
these geographical locations and currencies.

The Group does not hedge this risk. The Group’s exposure to 
foreign currency changes is not significant.

At balance date, the Group had the following exposures in 
Australian dollar equivalents of amounts to foreign currencies which 
are not effectively hedged:

2020
USD
$’000

2020
PGK
$’000

2019
USD
$’000

2019
PGK
$’000

Trade Receivables

-

1,650

112

592

At 30 September 2019

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Total

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables 

45,467

Borrowings

Contingent consideration

Total

Net inflow / (outflow)

5

223

45,695

108,383

125,244

37,396

162,640

-

-

105,046

49,032

154,078

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

125,244

37,396

162,640

37,123

-

-

34,415

71,538

91,102

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

105,046

49,032

154,078

45,467

5

223

45,695

108,383

Less than 
12 months
$’000

Between 
1 and 5 
years
$’000

Over 5 
years
$’000

Total
contractual
cash
flows
$’000

Contingent consideration is classified as Level 3. The balance 
of contingent consideration is recognised within the trade and 
other payables line in the Consolidated Statement of Financial 
Position. The release of the contingent consideration that does not 
represent payment is recognised within the other income line of the 
consolidated income and expense statement.

The Group tests annually whether goodwill has suffered any 
impairment, in accordance with the accounting policy stated in note 
1(n)(i). The recoverable amounts of cash-generating units have been 
determined based on value-in-use calculations. These calculations 
require the use of assumptions. Refer to note 13 for details of these 
assumptions and the potential impact of changes to the assumptions.

Contingent Consideration

Opening balance at 1 October 2019

Payments (JRA)

Reduction in contingent consideration (JRA)

Closing balance at 30 September 2020

Contingent Consideration

Opening balance at 1 October 2018

Payments (DMS and JRA)

Reduction in contingent consideration (JRA)

Closing balance at 30 September 2019

2020
$’000

223

(223)

-

-

2019
$’000

11,810

(4,059)

(7,528)

223

The carrying value of trade receivables, accrued revenue and trade 
payables are assumed to approximate their fair value due to their 
short-term nature or the effect of discounting on non-current financial 
assets not being significant.

(f) Capital risk management

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will 
be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to 
stakeholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance.

The current risk management structure of the Group is to use 
all equity funding except for funding required to purchase core 
information technology assets which is funded by a leasing facility.

The equity funded position of the Group is managed by the Board 
through dividends, new shares and share buy backs as well as the 
issue of new equity where considered appropriate to fund business 
acquisitions.

3.  Critical accounting estimates  

and judgements

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based 
on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of 
future events that may have a financial impact on the entity and that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. 
The resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal 
the related actual results. The estimates and assumptions that have 
a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are 
discussed below.

All other assets are reviewed for indicators or object evidence of 
impairment. If indicators or objective evidence exists, the recoverable 
amount is reviewed.

(ii) Share-based payments

The Group provides benefits to certain employees in the form of 
share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for rights over shares. The costs of share-based 
payment transactions with employees are measured by reference to 
the fair value of the equity instruments at the date at which they are 
granted. Refer to note 31.

The cost of share-based payments is recognised, together with 
a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the 
performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date 
on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award 
(the vesting period). In the event that the rights over shares do not 
vest at the end of the performance period, the expense relating to the 
unvested rights is reversed. No expense is recognised for awards that 
do not ultimately vest due to not meeting the non-market conditions or 
service conditions.

(iii) Long service leave

A liability for long service is recognised and measured at the present 
value of the estimated future cash flows to be made in respect of 
all employees at balance date. In determining the present value of 
the liability, attrition rates and pay increases through promotion and 
inflation have been taken into account.

(iv) Revenue contracts

Initial licence fee contracts entered into by the Group require 
judgement in the identification and separation of the contract 
components related to software licence fees, annual licence fees 
and platform services. The Group assesses each customer contract 
individually and revenue is assigned to each component based upon 
the stand alone fair value of the component relevant to the total 
contract value.

(v) Capitalisation of development costs

The Group capitalises costs related to software development. 
Software development costs are recognised upon meeting the criteria 
set out in note 1(n)(iii). The carrying value of these costs are regularly 
reviewed for impairment. Software development costs are amortised 
over a period of three to seven years.

(vii) AASB 16 Leases

The Group is required to determine the measurement of lease 
liabilities based on the present value of the remaining lease payments, 
discounted using the interest rate implicit in the lease, if readily 
available. Where the implicit interest rate is not readily available the 
Group is required to use the Group’s incremental borrowing rate. 
Judgement is required to determine the appropriate discount rate to 
apply. The discount rate must reflect the rate of interest that a lessee 
would have to pay to borrow the funds necessary to purchase the 
right-of-use asset, over a similar term and with a similar security, in a 
similar economic environment. 

120

121

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Intersegment revenue

(2,038)

2,208

Software
$'000

Consulting
$’000

Corporate
$’000

384

-

367

(170)

(53,819)

(6,642)

60,461

Total  
$’000

751

-

-

180,312

58,048

60,658

299,018

2020

Other income

Net royalty

Total revenue

Expenses

Total external expenses

(127,681)

(44,393)

(44,474)

(216,548)

Profit before tax

52,631

13,655

16,184

82,470

(c) Other segment information

(i) Segment revenue 

5.(a) Other income

Australia 

New Zealand & Asia Pacific*

APAC total

United Kingdom

2020
$'000

2019
$'000

Other income

250,586

240,580

Foreign exchange gains / (losses)

36,533

35,416

Interest received

287,119

275,996

Other*

11,899

10,444

Total other income

Total segment revenues from sales to external customers

299,018

286,440

2020
$’000

2019  
$’000

(3)

353

401

751

(2)

634

814

1,446

(19,525)

62,945

375,909

233,741

(18,638)

(ii) Segment assets 

Australia 

New Zealand & Asia Pacific*

APAC total

United Kingdom

Total Revenue

299,018

286,440

*Other income for 2019 includes a gain of $7.5m recognised on reduction of contingent consideration provision 
relating to the acquisition of JRA and an impairment of $7.3m recognised in relation to Intangible assets 
obtained through the acquisition of JRA.

6. 

Expenses

Profit before income tax includes the  
following specific expenses:

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

2020
$'000

2019
$'000

319,750

254,550

19,834

21,128

339,584

275,678

7,720

10,593

Depreciation

 • Corporate – includes all corporate functions.

Intersegment revenue

(1,399)

1,433

171,792

56,454

58,194

286,440

Revenue from contracts with customers

Total external expenses

(120,581)

(46,562)

(42,908)

(210,051)

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees**

Consulting services*

2020
$’000

2019  
$’000

Wages and salaries

Defined contribution plan expense

106,171

81,466

Payroll tax

101,121

98,725

Provision for employee benefits

62,482

61,599

Other

Software
$'000

Consulting
$’000

Corporate
$’000

Total  
$’000

81,466

101,307

-

-

-

61,599

40,622

543

-

-

-

-

-

-

903

(34)

81,466

101,307

61,599

40,622

1,446

-

-

(50,747)

(6,578)

57,325

51,211

9,892

15,286

76,389

(17,930)

58,459

318,424

211,567

(6,127)

Total segment assets

347,304

286,271

All significant non-current assets are located in Australia. Segment 
assets are presented net of deferred tax.

*Asia Pacific includes Malaysia and South Pacific

(iii) Major customers

The Group has a number of customers to which it provides both 
products and services, none of which contribute greater than 10% of 
external revenue

5.  Revenue

Plant and equipment

Total depreciation

Amortisation

Other intangible amortisation

Contract acquisition costs amortisation

Capitalised development amortisation

Amortisation of right-of-use assets

Total amortisation

Total depreciation and amortisation

Revenue - SaaS and continuing business

269,774

241,790

Total employee costs 

Initial licence fees**

27,342

40,622

Share-based payments

Annual licence fees associated with licence fees*1

1,151

2,582

Revenue - Legacy licence business

28,493

43,204

Occupancy costs1

Finance expense1

Total revenue from contracts with customers

298,267

284,994

Profit and loss movement in expected credit loss

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered

**Recognised at a point in time

1 This represents revenue on annual licence fees recognised from the date the associated initial licence is 

delivered until the end of that first financial year post delivery.

Foreign exchange (gain) / loss

(Gain) / Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

3,905

3,710

3,905

3,710

346

242

2,493

1,620

6,103

5,791

14,733

18,638

555

-

2,417

6,127

91,622

96,734

9,919

6,366

1,701

7,330

5,740

745

10,007

11,291

119,615

121,840

3,305

2,018

3,259

10,808

1,495

34

509

(38)

24

942

(294)

(3)

Another AASB 16 area that requires judgement relates to the 
assessment of the likelihood of the Group exercising, or not 
exercising any extension or termination options available within 
a lease. In performing these reasonably certain assessments 
management considers all facts and circumstances that create an 
economic incentive to either exercise, or not exercise an extension 
or termination option. 

(viii) COVID-19

Management have considered the potential impact of COVID-19 in 
performing the Group’s impairment assessments and in establishing 
the expected credit loss on financial assets. No adjustments 
were made to the Group’s assets as a result of these additional 
assessments. At a time when many businesses have struggled 
during the pandemic, TechnologyOne has continued to perform 
strongly. There has been no impact to the Group’s balance sheet. 
TechnologyOne has not received any JobKeeper government support. 

4. 

Segment information

(a) Description of segments

The Group’s chief operating decision maker, being the Chief Executive 
Officer, makes financial decisions and allocates resources based 
on the information received from the Group’s internal management 
system. Sales are attributed to an operating segment based on the 
type of product or service provided to the customer.

Segment information is prepared in conformity with the accounting 
policies of the Group as discussed in note 1 and the Accounting 
Standard AASB 8 Operating Segments. 

The Group’s reportable segments are:

 • Software – consists of Sales and Marketing, R&D, SaaS platform.

 • Consulting – responsible for services in relation to our software.

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Total assets

Total liabilities

Total depreciation and amortisation

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered

**Recognised at a point in time

2019

Revenue from contracts with 
customers

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees*

Consulting services*

Initial licence fees**

Other income

Intersegment revenues/expenses are where one operating segment 
has been charged for the use of another's expertise.

Royalties are a mechanism whereby each segment pays or 
receives funding for their contribution to the ongoing success of 
TechnologyOne. For example, Software pays Corporate for the use of 
corporate services.

The chief operating decision maker views each segment’s 
performance based on revenue post royalties and profit before tax. No 
reporting or reviews are made of segment assets, liabilities and cash 
flows and as such this is not measured or reported by segment.

(b) Segment information provided to the strategic  
steering committee

Net royalty

Total revenue

Expenses

Profit before tax

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Total assets

Total liabilities

Software
$'000

Consulting
$’000

Corporate
$’000

Total  
$’000

Total depreciation and amortisation

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered

**Recognised at a point in time

2020

Revenue from contracts with 
customers

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees*

Consulting services*

106,171

102,272

-

-

-

62,482

-

-

-

-

106,171

102,272

62,482

27,342

Initial licence fees**

27,342

-

122

1 Due to the adoption of AASB 16 Leases in the current year the profile of the lease related expense has 
changed from being included within the occupancy costs line of the consolidated income statement as a rent 
expense to being made up of a depreciation expense on the right-of-use asset and a finance expense on the 
lease liability. 

In addition to the employee benefits expense disclosed above, 
‘Variable costs’ in the consolidated income statement includes $18.6m 
(2019: $19.2m) relating to employee costs, ‘Contract acquisition costs’ 
in the consolidated statement of financial position includes $4.9m 
(2019: $3.8m) and ‘Capitalised development’ in the consolidated 
statement of financial position includes $32.3m (2019: $29.0m) 
relating to employee costs.  

123

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
7. 

Income tax expenses

(a) Income tax expense

Current tax

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

12,045

8,010

Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences

8,680

10,534

Adjustments for current tax of prior periods

(1,200)

(614)

Money market accounts at call are made for varying periods of 
between one day and three months, depending on immediate cash 
requirements of the Group, and earn interest at the respective money 
market deposit rates. Given the short-term nature of these accounts 
the fair value of cash assets at 30 September are their carrying values.

9.  Current assets - Trade and  

other receivables

Deferred income tax expense / (revenue) included in income 
tax expense comprises: 

19,525

17,930

Trade receivables

Allowance for expected credit losses

(Increase) / decrease in deferred tax assets

(6,575)

(2,796)

Sundry receivables

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

40,320

50,053

(2,885)

(1,135)

(39)

114

37,396

49,032

Adjustments for current tax of prior periods

(1,200)

(614)

(a) Allowance for expected credit losses

Increase / (decrease) in deferred tax liabilities

10,960

13,387

Adjustment for deferred taxes of prior periods

4,295

(57)

8,680

10,534

(b) Numerical reconciliation of income tax expense to prima      
facie tax payable

Profit from continuing operations before income tax expense 

82,470

76,389

Tax at the Australian tax rate of 30% (2019 - 30%) 

24,741

22,917

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

Research and development tax concession

(4,131)

(4,523)

Expenditure not allowable for income tax purposes

115

150

Income tax expense

19,525

17,930

(c) Amounts recognised directly in equity

Aggregate current and defered tax arising in the reporting 
period and not recognised in net profit or loss or other 
comprehensive income but directly debited or credited to 
equity: 

Net deferred tax - debited (credited) directly to equity

(2,315)

(1,481)

8.  Current assets - Cash and  

equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

125,244

105,046

The Group has a secured $2 million interchangeable facility which 
is transferable between an Overdraft, Fixed Rate Commercial Bill 
and Variable Rate Commercial Bill to assist with working capital 
requirements. The facility is unused at 30 September 2020.

Cash at bank earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank 
deposit rates.

(i) Trade receivables are non-interest bearing and are on 14 to 30 day 
terms. No interest is charged on trade receivables. 

Included in the trade receivable balance are debtors with a carrying 
amount of $7.6m (2019 - $9.3m) which are past due at the reporting 
date for which the consolidated entity has not specifically provided 
as there has not been a significant change in credit quality and the 
consolidated entity believes that the amounts are still considered 
recoverable. The consolidated entity does not hold any collateral 
over these balances, apart from the withdrawal of future support and 
software licence use rights. 

Movements in the provision for impairment of receivables are  
as follows:

Opening balance - 1 October

Increase/(decrease) in expected credit loss allowance

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

Unused amounts reversed

Closing balance - 30 September 2019

2020
$’000

1,135

2,885

(1,135)

2,885

2019
$’000

902

1,135

(902)

1,135

In determining the recoverability of a trade receivable the Group 
considers any change in the credit quality of the trade receivable 
from the date credit was initially granted up to the reporting date. The 
concentration of credit risk is limited due to the customer base being 
large and unrelated. 

Age

Trade Debtors

Expected  
credit loss

Trade Debtors

Expected  
credit loss

2020
$’000

30,051

5,915

715

3,369

2020
$’000

(456)

(90)

(11)

(2,328)

2019
$’000

39,804

4,081

2,237

3,931

2019
$’000

(903)

(93)

(51)

(89)

40,050

(2,885)

50,053

(1,136)

0 – 30 days

31 – 60 days

61 – 90 days

91+ days

Total

10.  Contract asset

Contract assets

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

22,283

24,722

12.  Non-current assets - property,  

plant and equipment

Allowance for expected credit losses

(232)

(115)

Year ended 30 September 2020

22,051

24,607

Opening net book amount

The above contract asset balance represents revenue recognised for 
contracts with customers which has not been invoiced at the end of 
the financial year, in line with customer contracts.

Additions

Disposals

Expected credit loss for contract assets   

Movements in the provision for impairment of contract assets are as 
follows: 

Depreciation charge

Make good movement

Excange difference

Office furniture 
& equipment
$’000

Other
$’000

10,659

2,008

(51)

(3,788)

(14)

9

241

22

-

(117)

-

-

Total
$’000

10,900

2,030

(51)

(3,905)

(14)

9

Closing net book amount

8,823

146

8,969

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

At 30 September 2020

Opening balance - 1 October

Increase/(decrease) in expected credit loss allowance 
recognised in profit and loss during the year

Unused amounts reversed

Closing balance - 30 September

115

117

-

232

-

115

-

115

11.  Current assets - Other current  

assets

Deposits receivable

2020
$’000

397

397

2019
$’000

463

463

Cost

41,510

4,769

Accumulated depreciation

(32,687)

(4,623)

Net book amount

8,823

146

Year ended 30 September 2019 

Opening net book amount

Additions

Disposals

Depreciation charge

Make good movement

Excange difference

12,201

2,464

(355)

(3,636)

(29)

14

79

239

(4)

(73)

-

-

46,279

(37,310)

8,969

12,280

2,703

(359)

(3,709)

(29)

14

Closing net book amount

10,659

241

10,900

At 30 September 2019

Cost

43,335

4,733

Accumulated depreciation

(32,676)

(4,492)

Net book amount

10,659

241

48,068

(37,168)

10,900

124

125

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
 
 
13.  Non-current assets - Intangible assets

Intellectual 
property/ 
source code 
$’000

Customer 
contracts 
$’000

Contract 
acquisition 
costs1
$’000

Software under 
development
$’000

Goodwill 
$’000

Software in use 
$’000

Total 
$’000

Year ended 30 September 2020

Opening net book amount

33,250

3,503

Additions

Transfers to software - in use

Amortisation charge

Impairment

Exchange difference

-

-

-

-

-

819

-

(291)

-

(8)

768

-

-

7,519

4,972

-

(55)

(2,493)

-

-

-

(7)

23,825

37,069

(33,911)

-

-

-

7,765

-

33,911

(6,103)

-

-

76,630

42,860

-

(8,942)

-

(15)

Closing net book amount

33,250

4,023

713

9,991

26,983

35,573

110,533

At 30 September 2020

Cost

Accumulated amortisation

Accumulated impairment

Net book amount

Year ended 30 September 2019

40,003

-

(6,753)

33,250

11,174

(4,474)

(2,677)

4,023

1,100

(387)

-

713

15,483

(5,492)

-

26,983

-

-

42,231

(6,658)

136,974

(170,011)

-

(9,430)

9,991

26,983

35,573

110,533

Opening net book amount

40,003

4,185

823

Additions

Transfers to software - in use

Amortisation charge

Impairment

Exchange difference

-

-

-

(6,753)

-

-

-

(187)

(500)

5

5,357

3,782

-

-

-

(55)

(1,620)

-

-

-

-

-

32,145

(8,320)

-

-

-

-

-

8,320

(555)

-

-

50,368

35,927

-

(2,417)

(7,253)

5

Closing net book amount

33,250

3,503

768

7,519

23,825

7,765

76,630

At 30 September 2019

Cost

Accumulation amortisation

Accumulation impairment

Net book amount

40,003

-

(6,753)

33,250

10,363

(4,183)

(2,677)

3,503

1,100

(332)

-

768

10,518

(2,999)

-

23,825

-

-

8,320

(555)

-

94,129

(8,069)

(9,430)

7,519

23,825

7,765

76,630

1 Balance of contract acquisition costs is split between current portion of $2.9m and non-current portion of $7.0m (2019: current $2.1m; non-current $5.4m).

(a) Impairment tests for goodwill

Goodwill and indefinite life intangibles are allocated to the Group's 
Software and Consulting cash generating units (CGUs) which are also 
operating and reportable segments for impairment testing purposes.

A segment-level summary of the goodwill and indefinite life intangible 
assets allocation is presented to the right.

2020

Goodwill

2019

Goodwill

Software 
$’000

Consulting 
$’000

Corporate 
$’000

23,643

9,608

Software 
$’000

Consulting 
$’000

Corporate 
$’000

23,643

9,608

Total 
$’000

33,251

2,022

35,273

Total 
$’000

33,251

2,022

35,273

-

-

-

-

-

-

Indefinite life intangibles

1,362

660

25,005

10,268

Indefinite life intangibles

1,362

660

25,005

10,268

The recoverable amounts have been determined based on a value in 
use calculation using cash flow projections based on financial budgets 
approved by senior management covering a five year period, as there 
is no active market against which to compare the fair value of the unit.

The key assumptions used for all CGUs in value in use calculations for 
30 September 2020 and 2019 are:

 • Budgeted margins - the basis used to determine the value 

assigned to budgeted margin is the average margin achieved in 
the year immediately before the budgeted year

 • Growth rates - based on long-term historical trends for each 

segment

 • The discount rate applied to cash flow projections is 15% pre-tax 

(2019 - 15%)

 • Terminal growth rates - these have been set at 2% (2019 - 3%)

14.  Non-current assets - Deferred  

tax assets

15.  Current liabilities - Trade and  

other payables

Trade payables

Contingent consideration

Sundry creditors

Directors fees

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

29,315

37,178

-

223

7,249

7,826

559

463

37,123

45,690

Trade payables and sundry creditors are non-interest bearing and 
are normally settled on 30 day terms. No interest is payable on 
outstanding balances. The Group has financial risk management 
policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within the credit 
timeframe.

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

16.  Current liabilities - Prepaid  
subscription revenue

Carrying amount at 1 October

Carrying amount at 30 September

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

147,558

136,557

144,148

147,558

Revenue recognised from the opening balance

145,359

135,361

Prepaid subscription revenue represents payments received or 
receivable in advance from customers for SaaS Fees and Annual 
Licence Fees which will be recognised as revenue in future periods, 
generally over the next 12 months. These amounts are a contract 
liability under AASB15. These amounts are enforceable, generally 
non-refundable when paid in accordance with the contract and do 
not result in a future cash outflow. The operating costs to deliver the 
services are not significant. 

17.  Current liabilities - Provisions

The balance comprises temporary differences attributable to:

Employee benefits

Provisions - other

Accrued expenses

Intangibles

Copyright - software

Lease liability (net)

Employee share trust

Prepaid subscription revenue

Other

Set-off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant  
to set-off provisions (note 20)

Net deferred tax assets

Deferred tax assets expected to be  
recovered within 12 months

Deferred tax assets expected to be  
recovered after more than 12 months

Movements:

4,958

4,338

1,089

2,204

753

245

1,718

1,513

1,826

753

240

3

3,536

2,699

40,762        36,604 

232

110

55,497

48,086

(26,892)

(15,933)

28,605

32,153

13,779

15,488

Make good provision

Other provisions1

14,826

16,665

Annual leave

28,605

32,153

Long service leave

2020
$’000

569

5,416

2019
$’000

100

1,818

8,030

6,639

6,533

5,304

20,548

13,861

Opening balance at 1 October

48,085

44,823

Credited / (charged) to the  
consolidated income statement

Credited / (charged) to equity

Offset from deferred tax liabilities

Closing balance at 30 September

6,575

2,796

837

466

(26,892)

(15,932)

28,605

32,153

1 On 2 October 2020, the Federal Court issued a judgement against TechnologyOne in a civil employment case. 
As a result of the judgement, the Group’s provision was increased to $5.2m (2019: $1.6m) as at 30 September 
2020. The company has retained very experienced counsel for an appeal to the Full Federal Court which was 
lodged on 27 October 2020.

126

127

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
18.  Non-current liabilities -  

Provisions

Long service leave

Make good provision

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

2,285

2,921

145

695

2,430

3,616

(a) Movements in provisions

Movements in each class of provision during the financial year, other 
than employee benefits, are set out below:

The non-current provisions have been discounted using a pre-tax rate 
that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money 
and the risks specific to the liability.

Lease liability

1 October 2019

Opening liability

New leases entered into during the year

Modifications during the year

Payments

Interest expense

Exchange difference

Closing liability

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

32,709

108

1,351

(324)

-

-

Total
$’000

32,817

1,351

(324)

21.  Contributed Equity

Share capital

Ordinary shares

Fully paid

2020
Shares

2019
Shares

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

319,295,458

317,827,581

40,551

35,302

(5,916)

(49)

(5,965)

Movements in ordinary share capital

1,452

12

29,284

2

-

61

1,454

12

29,345

(a) Employee Share Option Plan

Date

Details

Number of shares

$’000

1 Oct 2019

Opening balance

317,827,581

35,302

The following are amounts recognised in profit or loss under  

Exercise of options

1,467,877

5,249

23.  Dividends

Ordinary shares

Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2019 of 8.78 
Cents (2018 - 6.16 Cents) per fully paid share paid in December 
2019 (2018- December 2018)

60% franked (2018- 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

Special dividend for the year ended 30 September 2019 of 
0.00 Cents (2018 - 2.00 Cents) per fully paid share (2018- 
December 2018)

(2018- 75% franked) based on tax paid at 30%

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2020 of 
3.47 Cents (2019 - 3.15 Cents) per fully paid share paid in June 
2020 (2019- June 2019)

60% franked (2019- 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

27,930

19,527

-

6,334

11,058

9,989

Annual 
Leave
$’000

Long 
service 
leave
$’000

Make 
Good
$’000

Service Level 
Commitment
$’000

Legal 
provision
$'000

Total
$’000

6,639

8,225

795

218

1,600

17,477

AASB 16:

Amortisation on right-of-use assets

Interest expense on lease liabilities

4,436

2,555

8

49

3,600

10,648

Expense related to short-term leases (included in occupancy 
costs)

(3,045)

(1,963)

(89)

(50)

-

(5,147)

Total amount recognised in profit or loss

8,030

8,817

714

217

5,200

22,978

Cashflow from leases

2020

Carrying amount at  
1 October 2019

Additional provisions 
recognised

Amount used during 
the year

Carrying amount 
at 30 September 
2020

19.  Leases

Right-of-use-assets

Total cash outflow as a lessee

2020
$’000

5,791

1,454

599

7,844

2019
$’000

-

-

-

-

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

6,564

7,398

6,564

7,398

Year ended 30 September 2020

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

Total
$’000

Opening net book amount

28,578

108

28,686

Additions

Modifications during the year

Disposals

Depreciation charge

Exchange difference

Closing net book amount

At 30 September 2020

Cost

Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

1,206

(324)

-

(5,746)

9

23,723

29,469

(5,746)

23,723

-

-

-

(45)

-

63

108

(45)

63

1,206

(324)

-

(5,791)

9

23,786

29,577

(5,791)

23,786

20.   Non-current liabilities –  

Deferred tax liabilities

The balance comprises temporary  
differences attributable to:

Contract assets

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes

Prepayments

Capitalised development 

Contract acquisition costs

Total deferred tax liabilities

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

(4,269)

(4,237)

(1,323)

(28)

64

(26)

(18,767)

(9,477)

(2,505)

(2,256)

(26,892)

(15,932)

Set-off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant to set-off provisions

26,892

15,932

Net deferred tax liabilities (note 14)

-

-

Movements:

Opening balance at 1 October 

(15,932)

(2,545)

Charged/(credited) to the Consolidated income statement

(10,960)

(13,387)

Offset to deferred tax assets

Closing balance at 30 September

26,892

15,932

-

-

30 Sep 2020

Closing balance

319,295,458

40,551

Total dividends paid

38,988

35,850

1 Oct 2018

Opening balance

Exercise of options

316,691,676

1,135,905

33,171

2,131

(a) Dividends policy

30 Sep 2019

Closing balance

317,827,581

35,302

Information relating to the TechnologyOne Employee Share Option 
Plan, including details of options issued, exercised and lapsed during 
the financial year and options outstanding at the end of the financial 
year, is set out in note 31. 

The Board will continue to consider paying a special dividend in future 
years if cash reserves remain high, franking credits are available, 
growth continues as is expected and there is no compelling alternative 
use for the cash reserves.

(b) Dividends not recognised at the end of the reporting 
period

22.  Reserves

(a) Other reserves

Share-based payments

Foreign currency translation

Dividend reserve

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

31,342

25,722

2,136

1,850

30,046

27,905

63,524

55,477

Final

In addition to the above dividends, since year end the directors 
have recommended the payment of a final dividend of 9.41 
cents per fully paid ordinary share (2019 - 8.78 cents) 60% 
franked (2019 - 60%) based on tax paid at 30% (2019 - 30%).

The aggregate amount of proposed dividend expected to be 
paid out of retained earnings, but not recognised as a liability 
at year end

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

30,046

27,905

30,046

27,905

(b) Nature and purpose of other reserves

(i) Share-based payments

The reserve is used to record the value of equity benefits provided 
to employees, through share-based payment transactions and 
associated tax benefits.

(ii) Foreign currency translation

Exchange differences arising on translation of the foreign controlled 
entity are recognised in other comprehensive income as described 
in note 1(c) and accumulated in a separate reserve within equity. The 
cumulative amount is reclassified to the income statement when the 
net investment is disposed of.

(iii) Dividend reserve

(c) Franked Dividends

The franked portions of the final dividends recommended after 30 
September 2019 will be franked out of existing franking credits or out 
of franking credits arising from the payment of income tax in the year 
ended 30 September 2020.

Franking account balance as at the end of the financial year at 
30% (2019: 30%)

Franking credits that will arise from the payments of income tax 
payable as at the end of the financial year

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

3,044

(1,202)

519

2,728

3,563

1,526

The reserve records retained earnings set aside for the payment of 
future dividends.

The above amounts represent the balance of the franking account as 
at the end of the reporting period, adjusted for:

(A) franking credits that will arise from the payment of the amount of 
the provision for income tax

128

129

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
(B) franking debits that will arise from the payment of dividends 
recognised as a liability at the reporting date

The impact on the franking account of the dividend recommended by 
the Directors since the end of the reporting date, but not recognised 
as a liability at the reporting date, will be a reduction in the franking 
account of $7,730,209 (2019 - $7,175,639). 

consideration to such matters which are or may be subject to claims or 
litigation at year end and, unless specific provisions have been made, 
are of the opinion that no material contingent liability for such claims 
of litigation exists. The group had no material contingent assets or 
liabilities.

Guarantees

24.  Key management personnel  

disclosures

(a) Key management personnel disclosures

At 30 September 2020, the Group had $3,397,831 (2019 - $6,155,631) 
in outstanding performance guarantees. The total available guarantee 
facility is $6,650,000 (2019 - $7,000,000). The Group also had unused 
foreign currency dealing limits of $1,606,393 (2019 - $1,256,319).

2020
$

2019
$

The parent entity, Technology One Limited, continues to support its 
subsidiaries in their operations, by way of financial support.

Short-term employee benefits

5,289,169

4,803,959

27.  Related party transactions

Deferred retention bonus

Share-based payments

227,586

108,195

934,784

766,631

6,451,539

5,678,785

(a) Ultimate controlling entity

The ultimate controlling entity of the consolidated entity is Technology 
One Limited, a company incorporated in Australia.

(b) Equity instrument disclosures relating to key 
management personnel

Details of options provided as remuneration to KMP and shares issued 
on the exercise of such, together with terms and conditions can be 
found in the remuneration report.

25.  Remuneration of auditors
During the year, the following fees were paid or payable for services 
provided by the auditor of the consolidated entity:

(a) Ernst & Young (Australia)

2020
$

2019
$

Fees to Ernst and Young (Australia)

Fees for auditing the statutory financial report of the parent 
covering the group and auditing the statutory financial reports 
of any controlled entities

801,795

527,609

Fees for assurance services that are required by legislation

-

-

Fees for other assurance and agreed-upon-procedure services

174,440

168,600

Fees for other services

148,290

131,672

(b) Transactions with related parties

The parent entity entered into the following transactions during the 
year with related parties in the wholly owned group:

 • Loans were advanced and repayments received on short-term 

intercompany accounts.

 • Marketing support and management fees were charged to wholly 

owned controlled entities.

 • Dividends were paid from Technology One New Zealand Limited 

to the parent entity during the year.

These transactions were undertaken on commercial terms and 
conditions. No allowance for expected credit loss has been 
recognised for amounts due to and receivable from related parties.

The ownership interest in related parties in the wholly owned group is 

set out in note 28.

28.  Controlled entities
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets, liabilities 
and results of the following subsidiaries in accordance with the 
accounting policy described in note 1(b):

Country of 
Incorporation

Class of shares

2020%

2019%

Equity holding

Total remuneration of Ernst & Young Australia

1,124,525

827,881

Name of entity

The relative ratio of other services to audit and assurance services 
was 13% (2019 19%).

26.  Contingencies
TechnologyOne is a global business and from time to time in the 
ordinary course of business it receives enquiries from various 
regulators and government bodies. TechnologyOne cooperates fully 
with all enquiries and these enquiries do not require disclosure in their 
initial state, however should the Group become aware that an enquiry 
is developing further or if any regulator or government action is taken 
against the group, appropriate disclosure is made in accordance with 
the relevant accounting standards.  

As a global business, from time to time TechnologyOne is also subject 
to various claims and litigation from third parties during the ordinary 
course of its business. The Directors of TechnologyOne have given 

Technology One 
Corporation Sdn Bhd

Technology One New 
Zealand Ltd

Technology One UK 
Limited

England

Ordinary

Avand Pty Ltd

Australia

Ordinary

Desktop Mapping 
Systems Pty Ltd (DMS)

Digital Mapping Solutions 
NZ Limited (DMS)

Australia

Ordinary

New Zealand

Ordinary

Boldridge Pty Ltd

Australia

Ordinary

Icon Solution Unit Trust 
(ICON)

Australia

Ordinary

Malaysia

Ordinary

100

100

Increase / (decrease) in prepaid subscription revenue

(3,410)

11,001

New Zealand

Ordinary

100

100

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities

103,511

76,835

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

30.  Earnings per share

(a) Basic earnings per share

Basic earnings per share (cents per share)

Diluted earnings per share (cents per share)

2020
Cents

19.75

19.61

2019
Cents

18.43

18.30

Profit used for calculating basic and diluted earnings per share 
($'000)

62,945

58,459

Country of 
Incorporation

Class of shares

2020%

2019%

Equity holding

Australia

Ordinary

100

100

(b) Weighted average number of shares used  
as denominator

2020
Number

2019
Number

Australia

Ordinary

100

100

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used as 
the denominator in calculating basic earnings per share

318,659,285

317,215,635

Name of entity

Icon Strategic Solutions 
Pty Ltd

Jeff Roorda & Associates 
Pty Ltd (JRA)

The parent entity is Technology One Limited, a public company, limited 
by shares and is domiciled in Brisbane, Australia and whose shares 
are traded on the Australian Securities Exchange. All entities operate 
in the software industry in their geographical locations. The Registered 
office is located at:

Technology One HQ 
Level 11, 
540 Wickham Street, 
Fortitude Valley, Qld, 4006

29.  Reconciliation of profit after  

income tax to net cash inflow  
from operating activities

Profit for the year

Depreciation and amortisation

Non-cash employee benefits expense - share-based payments

Finance costs

Impairment of intangibles

Reduction in contingent consideration (JRA)

Net (gain) / loss on sale of non-current assets

Movement in ECL through profit or loss

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

62,945

58,459

18,638

3,305

1,495

-

-

(38)

34

6,127

1,947

-

7,253

(7,528)

359

348

(increase)/decrease in trade debtors and contract assets

14,192

(12,070)

(increase)/decrease in prepayments and other current assets

1,959

(1,958)

Adjustments for calculation of diluted earnings per share:

Options

2,295,131

2,284,678

Weighted average number of ordinary and potential 
ordinary shares used as the denominator in 
calculating diluted earnings per share

320,954,416

319,500,313

There are no potentially dilutive share instruments not included in the 
calculation of diluted earnings per share.

There have been no transactions involving ordinary shares or potential 
ordinary shares that would significantly change the number of ordinary 
shares or potential ordinary shares outstanding between the reporting 
date and the date of completion of these financial statements.

31.  Share-based payments

(a) Employee option plan

Options are granted to employees at the discretion of the Board 
based on the option plan approved by the Board.

TechnologyOne issues options with up to 25% discount on the 
volume weighted average price for the 10 days prior to the grant 
date. 

The options typically vest if and when the employees satisfy the 
following conditions:

 • The employee must be in the same or higher position at the time 

of exercise

 • A successor must be in place before the last tranche of options 

can be exercised

 • Satisfactory performance on non-financial indicators as 

determined by the Executive Chairman

(increase)/decrease in deferred tax assets and liabilities

3,548

6,299

Increase / (decrease) in trade creditors

(3,967)

7,526

The period available between vesting date and expiry date of each 
option is five years. There are no cash settlement alternatives.

Increase / (decrease) in employee entitlements

Increase / (decrease) in other provisions

1,983

2,827

(93)

(835)

Each option entitles the holder to purchase one share. Fair values 
of options granted as part of remuneration are based on values 
determined using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.

130

131

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
Set out below are summaries of options granted under the plan:

Balance at start of the 
period 
Number

Issued during the 
year  
Number

Exercised during 
the period 
Number

Forfeited during 
the period 
Number

Balance at the end 
of the period 
Number

Vested and 
exercisable at end 
of the period 
Number

Balance at start of the 
period 
Number

Issued during the 
year  
Number

Exercised during 
the period 
Number

Forfeited during 
the period 
Number

Balance at the end 
of the period 
Number

Vested and 
exercisable at end 
of the period 
Number

Issue date

Expiry date

Exercise price

2020

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

                  -   

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

           7.3854 

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

           5.5391 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           4.1122 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           5.4829 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

           1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

           1.8914 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

           4.1166 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.0313 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

           4.9952 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           0.8633 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.8914 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2024

           5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.7474 

1/07/2018

1/07/2026

           1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/07/2025

           1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/10/2026

           4.1122 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           0.8633 

23/05/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6046 

7/04/2017

30/09/2024

                  -   

10/03/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6027 

14/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.0688 

7/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.2334 

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

           5.7474 

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

                  -   

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           0.8633 

1/07/2015

1/07/2022

           0.8633 

25/08/2009

25/08/2022

           0.3450 

25/08/2010

25/08/2023

           0.3450 

25/08/2011

25/08/2024

           0.3450 

-

-

-

1,003,568

390,520

12,500

50,000

313,582

176,667

100,101

250,250

12,500

50,000

1,593,113

50,000

11,177

167,000

167,000

22,853

29,150

247,373

978

22,516

50,000

50,000

762,737

10,000

29,150

16,650

30,000

30,000

30,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

29,250

12,500

50,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

16,650

155,482

-

1,691

578,551

913,938

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(50,000)

-

-

-

-

(15,243)

-

-

-

-

(151,667)

(25,000)

1,691

578,551

913,938

988,325

390,520

12,500

-

313,582

-

100,101

29,250

12,500

50,000

(27,943)

1,565,170

-

-

-

-

-

-

50,000

11,177

167,000

-

22,853

16,650

(46,375)

155,482

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(221,000)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(167,000)

-

(12,500)

(45,516)

(978)

-

(50,000)

(50,000)

10,000

(657,788)

(97,949)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(10,000)

(12,500)

-

(30,000)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

22,516

22,516

-

-

17,000

-

16,650

16,650

-

30,000

30,000

-

-

17,000

-

16,650

16,650

-

30,000

30,000

Total

5,679,385

1,554,180

(1,458,949)

(212,510)

5,562,106

396,698

Weighted average exercise price

$4.27

$6.10

$3.60

$4.97

$4.93

$3.27

Issue date

Expiry date

Exercise price

2019

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           4.1122 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           5.4829 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

           1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

           1.8914 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

           4.1166 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.0313 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

           4.9952 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           0.8633 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.1634 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           1.8914 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.1456 

2,343,304

1/10/2017

1/10/2024

           5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.7474 

1/07/2018

1/07/2026

           1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/07/2025

           1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/10/2026

           4.1122 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           1.8914 

1/07/2017

2/07/2024

           1.5862 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           1.3388 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           1.1634 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           1.0313 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           0.8633 

23/05/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6046 

7/04/2017

30/09/2024

                  -   

10/03/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6027 

20/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.1064 

14/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.0688 

7/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.2334 

50,000

11,177

167,000

167,000

22,799

50,000

12,500

167,000

16,650

225,667

249,950

189,759

978

22,516

101,242

50,000

50,000

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

           5.7474 

900,666

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

                  -   

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           0.5302 

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           0.8633 

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           1.0313 

1/07/2016

2/07/2023

           1.5862 

11/04/2016

1/10/2023

           4.7969 

1/07/2015

1/07/2022

           0.8633 

25/08/2009

25/08/2022

           0.3450 

10,000

50,000

54,150

74,000

12,500

221,673

41,650

30,000

1,210,593

390,520

12,500

50,000

313,582

176,667

100,101

250,250

16,750

12,500

50,000

-

-

-

-

-

54

-

-

-

-

-

-

57,614

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(50,000)

(12,500)

(167,000)

(16,650)

(151,667)

(220,800)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(50,000)

(25,000)

(74,000)

(12,500)

(146,162)

(25,000)

-

(207,025)

1,003,568

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(16,750)

-

-

390,520

12,500

50,000

313,582

176,667

100,101

250,250

-

12,500

50,000

(750,191)

1,593,113

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(74,000)

-

-

-

-

(101,242)

-

-

(137,929)

-

-

-

-

-

(75,511)

-

-

50,000

11,177

167,000

167,000

22,853

-

-

-

-

-

29,150

247,373

978

22,516

-

50,000

50,000

762,737

10,000

-

29,150

-

-

-

16,650

30,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

29,150

-

978

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

29,150

-

-

-

16,650

30,000

132

133

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple  
  
Issue date

Expiry date

Exercise price

Balance at start of the 
period 
Number

Issued during the 
year  
Number

Exercised during 
the period 
Number

Forfeited during 
the period 
Number

Balance at the end 
of the period 
Number

Vested and 
exercisable at end 
of the period 
Number

25/08/2010

25/08/2023

           0.3450 

25/08/2011

25/08/2024

           0.3450 

1/05/2009

1/07/2021

           0.3600 

30,000

30,000

55,000

-

-

-

-

-

(55,000)

-

-

-

30,000

30,000

-

30,000

30,000

-

Weighted average exercise price

$1.92

$3.74

$1.58

$4.75

$4.27

$0.58

5,407,181

2,641,131

(1,006,279)

(1,362,648)

5,679,385

165,928

31.  Share-based payments  

(continued)

At September 2020 a total of 5,562,106 options (2019 – 5,679,358) 
were offered to employees. 

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of options 
exercised during the year ended 30 September 2020 was $3.60 
(2019 - $1.58).

The weighted average remaining contractual life of share options 
outstanding at the end of the period was 6 years (2019 - 6.0 years).

Fair value of options granted

The fair value of the equity-settled options is measured at the 
reporting date using the Black-Scholes option pricing model taking 
into account the terms and conditions upon which the instruments 
were granted.

(b) Executive performance rights 

After further market consultation, the Group made the decision to 
return to issuing options or EPRs. Please refer to section 3 of the 
remuneration report for further information.

(c) Expenses arising from share-based payment transactions

Total expenses arising from share-based payment transactions 
recognised during the year as part of employee benefit expense were 
as follows:

Options issued under employee option plan:

Vested

Forfeited

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

3,355

2,243

(50)

(296)

3,305

1,947

The fair value of options granted during the year was between $1.93 
and $3.39 (2019 - $1.49 - $2.23).

Total share-based payment expense

The model inputs for options granted during the year ended 30 
September 2020 included:

(I)  Dividend yield of 1.6% (2019 – 2.1%)

(II) Expected volatility 29.5% (2019: 30%)

(III) Risk-free interest rate 0.62-1.89% (2019 1.98 – 2.1%)

(IV) Expected life of option 3.3 years (2019 – 3.3 years)

(V) Option exercise price between $7.39 and $5.54 (2019 - $4.11 -  

  $5.48)

(VI) Weighted average share price at grant date was $7.39 (2019 

-  $6.13)

The expected volatility reflects the assumption that the historical 
volatility of the Group’s share price over a period similar to the life of 
the options is indicative of future trends, which may not necessarily be 
the actual outcome.

32.  Parent entity financial  

information

33.  Events after the reporting  

period

(a) Summary financial information

(a) Dividends

On 19 November 2020, the Directors of Technology One Limited 
declared a final dividend on ordinary shares in respect of the 2020 
financial year. The total amount of the dividend is $30,045,703 and is 
60% franked.

On 2 October 2020, the Federal Court issued a judgement against 
TechnologyOne in a civil employment case. As a result of the 
judgement, the Group’s provision was increased to $5.2m (2019: 
$1.6m) as at 30 September 2020 (refer to note 17). The company has 
retained very experienced counsel for an appeal to the Full Federal 
Court which was lodged on 27 October 2020.

No other matter or circumstance has occurred subsequent to period 
end that has significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the 
operations of the Group, the results of those operations or the state of 
affairs of the Group or economic entity in subsequent financial years.

The individual financial statements for the parent entity show the 
following aggregate amounts:

Balance sheet

Current assets

Non-current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Shareholders' equity

Contributed equity

Dividend reserve

Share option reserve

Retained earnings

Profit or loss before tax for the year

Total comprehensive income

2020
$’000

2019
$’000

181,777

161,626

197,068

150,331

378,845

311,957

178,175

170,139

37,086

-

215,261

170,139

40,551

35,302

30,046

27,905

31,342

25,722

62,278

49,309

164,217

138,238

75,787

74,075

75,787

74,075

At 30 September 2020, the statement of financial position shows a 
current liability balance of $178m (30 September 2019: $170m) which 
is attributable to the prepaid subscription revenue balance in current 
liabilities. As prepaid subscription revenue represents payments 
received or receivable in advance from customers for SaaS Fees and 
Annual Licence Fees which will be recognised in future periods, and 
not a future cash outflow, this balance does not impact the Group’s 
ability to meet its short-term obligations as and when they fall due.

(b) Guarantees entered into by the parent entity

At 30 September 2020, the Group had $3,397,831 (2019 - $6,155,631) 
in outstanding performance guarantees. The total available guarantee 
facility is $6,650,000 (2019 - $7,000,000). The Group also had unused 
foreign currency dealing limits of $1,606,393 (2019 - $1,256,319).

The parent entity, Technology One Limited, continues to support its 
subsidiaries in their operations, by way of financial support.

(c) Contingent liabilities of the parent entity

At 30 September 2020, the Parent had no contingent liabilities.

134

135

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simple 
 
 
 
 
Directors' declaration

In accordance with a resolution of the Directors of Technology One Limited, I state that:

In the opinion of the Directors:

(a) the financial statements and notes set out on pages 109 to 135 are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:

(i) giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 30 September 2020 and of its performance for the 
year ended on that date; and

(ii) complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian Accounting Interpretations) and the Corporations 
Regulations 2001;

(b) the financial statements and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in note 1(a); and

(c) there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable; and

(d) this declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made to the Directors in accordance with section 
295A of the Corporations Act 2001 for the reporting year ended 30 September 2020.

On behalf of the Board of Directors

Adrian Di Marco 
Director 
Brisbane 
24 November 2020

Ernst & Young
111 Eagle Street
Brisbane  QLD  4000 Australia GPO 
Box 7878 Brisbane  QLD  4001

Tel:  +61  7  3011  3333 
Fax:  +61  7  3011  3100 
ey.com/au

Auditor’s Independence Declaration to the Directors of TechnologyOne 
Limited

As lead auditor for the audit of the financial report of TechnologyOne Limited for the financial year ended 
30 September 2020, I declare to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been:

a. No contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 in 

relation to the audit; and

b. No contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct in relation to the audit.

This declaration is in respect of TechnologyOne Limited and the entities it controlled during the 
financial year

Ernst & Young

Alison de Groot 
Partner
24 November 2020

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

136

137

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleErnst & Young
111 Eagle Street
Brisbane  QLD  4000 Australia GPO 
Box 7878 Brisbane  QLD  4001

Tel:  +61  7  3011  3333 
Fax:  +61  7  3011  3100 
ey.com/au

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Technology One Limited

Report on the audit of the financial report

Opinion
We have audited the financial report of Technology One Limited (the Company) and its subsidiaries
(collectively the Group), which comprises the consolidated statement of financial position as at 30 
September 2020, the consolidated income statement, the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income, consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the 
year then ended, notes to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting 
policies, and the directors’ declaration.

In our opinion, the accompanying financial report of the Group is in accordance with the Corporations 
Act 2001, including:

a. Giving a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Group as at 30 September 

2020 and of its consolidated financial performance for the year ended on that date; and

b. Complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Our responsibilities under 
those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial report 
section of our report. We are independent of the Group in accordance with the auditor independence 
requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 and the ethical requirements of the Accounting Professional 
and Ethical Standards Board’s APES 110 Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants (including 
Independence Standards) (the Code) that are relevant to our audit of the financial report in Australia. 
We have also fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with the Code.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for 
our opinion.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in our 
audit of the financial report of the current year. These matters were addressed in the context of our 
audit of the financial report as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, but we do not provide a 
separate opinion on these matters. For each matter below, our description of how our audit addressed 
the matter is provided in that context.

We have fulfilled the responsibilities described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial report section of our report, including in relation to these matters. Accordingly, our audit 
included the performance of procedures designed to respond to our assessment of the risks of material 
misstatement of the financial report. The results of our audit procedures, including the procedures 
performed to address the matters below, provide the basis for our audit opinion on the accompanying 
financial report.

Measurement and recognition of revenue and associated assets and liabilities

Why significant

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

The Group has the following revenue streams:

Our audit procedures included the following:

► SaaS fees;
► Annual licence fees;
► Initial licence fees; and
► Consulting services

The Group contracts with its customers using written 
contracts which often include a number of products 
and services (separately identifiable components). 
Revenue recognition for these contracts was 
considered to be a key audit matter due to the 
complexity of contracts and the judgement required to 
allocate revenue amongst the respective performance 
obligations.

Note 1(d) to the financial statements details the 
Group’s revenue streams and the associated 
accounting policies. Revenue is disclosed in Note 5, 
associated assets in Note 9 and Note 10 and 
associated liabilities in Note 16.

► For a sample of signed customer contracts, we
obtained the supporting documentation and
assessed management’s judgement on whether
the revenue recognition criteria had been met.
The assessment included whether there were
contract modifications or delayed payment
terms.

► The testing of the customer contracts included:







The determination of stand-alone price
for separately identifiable components;

The allocation of the transaction price
to identified performance obligations,
separated into the different revenue
streams, and;

The timing of revenue recognition
based on the satisfaction of
performance obligations.

► For a sample of consulting service contracts,

(time and materials) we assessed the Group’s
controls associated with the recording of
consulting days delivered and the application of
contracted fee rates to these days.

► For prepaid subscription revenue (contract
liabilities) and contract assets, we tested a
sample of balances at year end that included:







Agreeing the amounts recorded to
invoice and payment;

Reperforming the recognition of
revenue based on the satisfaction of
performance obligations; and

Recalculating the amount of the
contract asset or contract liability
balance at year end.

► Assessed the adequacy of the financial report

disclosures included in the financial statements.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

138

139

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleCapitalisation of software development costs

Why significant

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

As set out in Note 13 to the financial statements the 
Group capitalises costs related to the development of 
software products. Software development is core to 
the Company’s operations and requires judgement as 
to whether it meets the capitalisation criteria of AASB 
138 Intangible Assets. The carrying value of the 
capitalised assets totalled $62.6m as disclosed in Note 
13.

The  capitalisation  of  software  development  costs  was 
a key audit matter due to the significant management 
judgements, including:

► Whether the costs incurred relate to research

costs, which are required to be expensed or
development costs that are eligible for
capitalisation;

► The assessment of the useful life of the asset

and the timing of amortisation;

► The assessment of future economic benefits
and recoverability of the capitalised software
development costs.

We performed the following procedures in respect of 
the development expenditure capitalised:

► Assessed the Group’s policy of capitalisation of
software development costs for compliance with
Australian Accounting Standards.

► Held inquiries with Project Directors, to

understand development activities assessment
and the feasibility of completion.

► For a sample of capitalised software

development costs, we tested whether additions
were appropriately supported to payroll records
or third party documentation and attributed to
development activities.

► Considered the appropriateness of the

amortisation period for the capitalised software
development costs.

► Assessed the recoverability of capitalised

software development costs.

► Assessed the adequacy of the financial report

disclosures included in the financial statements.

Information other than the financial report and auditor’s report thereon
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information 
included in the Company’s 2020 annual report other than the financial report and our auditor’s report 
thereon. We obtained the directors’ report that is to be included in the annual report, prior to the date of 
this auditor’s report, and we expect to obtain the remaining sections of the annual report after the date 
of this auditor’s report.

Our  opinion  on  the  financial  report  does  not  cover  the  other  information  and  we  do  not  and  will  not 
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon, with the exception of the Remuneration Report and 
our related assurance opinion.

In connection with our audit of the financial report, our responsibility is to read the other information and, 
in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial report or 
our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If, based on the work we have performed on the other information obtained prior to the date of this 
auditor’s report, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are 
required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard.

Responsibilities of the directors for the financial report
The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a true 
and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001 and 
for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the 
financial report that gives a true and fair view and is free from material misstatement, whether due to 
fraud or error.

In preparing the financial report, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to 
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters relating to going concern and using the 
going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or to cease 
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial report
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial report as a whole is free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes 
our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit 
conducted in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards will always detect a material 
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, 
individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions 
of users taken on the basis of this financial report.

As part of an audit in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards, we exercise professional 
judgment and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:

► Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to fraud
or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit evidence
that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not detecting a
material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from error, as fraud may
involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the override of internal
control.

► Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit

procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an
opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control.

► Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting

estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.

► Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting

and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events
or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern.
If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our auditor’s
report to the related disclosures in the financial report or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to
modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up to the date of
our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Group to cease to
continue as a going concern.

► Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial report, including the

disclosures, and whether the financial report represents the underlying transactions and events in
a manner that achieves fair presentation.

► Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the financial information of the entities or
business activities within the Group to express an opinion on the financial report. We are
responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the Group audit. We remain solely
responsible for our audit opinion.

We communicate with the directors regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of the 
audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we 
identify during our audit.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

140

141

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleWe also provide the directors with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical requirements 
regarding independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other matters that may 
reasonably be thought to bear on our independence, and where applicable, actions taken to eliminate 
threats or safeguards applied.

From the matters communicated to the directors, we determine those matters that were of most 
significance in the audit of the financial report of the current year and are therefore the key audit matters. 
We describe these matters in our auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public disclosure 
about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, we determine that a matter should not be 
communicated in our report because the adverse consequences of doing so would reasonably be 
expected to outweigh the public interest benefits of such communication.

Report on the audit of the Remuneration Report

Opinion on the Remuneration Report

We have audited the Remuneration Report included within the Directors’ Report for the year ended 30 
September 2020.

In our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Technology One Limited for the year ended 30 September 
2020, complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001.

Responsibilities
The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the Remuneration 
Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001. Our responsibility is to express 
an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in accordance with Australian 
Auditing Standards.

Ernst & Young

Alison de Groot 
Partner
Brisbane
24 November 2020

Jennifer Barker 
Partner
Brisbane
24 November 2020

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Shareholder information

The shareholder information set out below was applicable as at 07 December 2020.

(a) Distribution of equity securities

Number of shares

100,001 and Over

10,001 to 100,000

5,001 to 10,000

1,001 to 5,000

1 to 1,000

Number of shareholders

69

1,186

1,225

4,371

3,986

There were 183 holders of less than a marketable parcel of ordinary shares.

(b) Equity security holders

Twenty largest quoted equity security holders

Name

JL MACTAGGART HOLDINGS PTY LTD1

MASTERBAH PTY LTD1

HYPERION ASSET MANAGEMENT

SELECTOR FUNDS MANAGEMENT

FUNDSMITH

MODRIAN INVESTMENT PARTNERS

INVESCO (OPPENHEIMER FUNDS)

WASATCH GLOBAL INVESTORS

FIRST SENTIER INVESTORS

ACADIAN ASSET MANAGEMENT

VANGUARD INVESTMENTS AUSTRALIA

DIMENSIONAL FUND ADVISORS

VINVA INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT

ARGO INVESTMENTS

STATE STREET GLOBAL ADVISORS

BLACKROCK INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT (SAN FRANSISCO)

BLACKROCK INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT (SYDNEY)

PENDAL GROUP

COLUMBIA WANGER ASSET MANAGEMENT

VANGUARD GROUP

Number held

%IC

30,902,500

9.62%

20,378,500

6.35%

14,166,960

13,571,847

12,376,995

11,111,305

4.41%

4.23%

3.97%

3.46%

10,580,024

3.29%

8,225,822

2.56%

8,076,881

2.52%

7,894,053

2.46%

7,042,164

6,167,228

6,144,894

5,964,564

5,682,082

5,108,450

4,651,993

4,592,538

4,428,628

4,200,217

2.19%

1.92%

1.91%

1.86%

1.77%

1.59%

1.45%

1.43%

1.38%

1.31%

191,627,645

59.68%

1Substantial holder (including associate holdings) in Technology One Limited. 
In their capacity as an investment manager, the following have lodged Form 604 notices as a Substantial Shareholder under section 608 of the Corporations Act: Hyperion Asset Management 
Limited (5.59% as at 02/11/20) and Pinnacle Investment Management Group Limited (5.05% as at 22/11/20)

(c) Voting rights 

All ordinary shares issued by Technology One Limited carry one vote per share without restriction. Options and Performance 
Rights have no voting rights.

142

143

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleCorporate directory - Technology One Limited

Corporate calendar

Board of Directors

Branch Locations

Lawyer

The following calendar shows the planned dates for significant shareholder events for the 2020 year.  

These dates are subject to change. The declaration of dividends is subject to board approval.

Brisbane

Sydney

Melbourne

Canberra

Adelaide

Perth

Hobart

Auckland

Wellington

Kuala Lumpur

Maidenhead

Auditor

Ernst & Young

Level 51, 111 Eagle Street

Brisbane QLD 4000

www.ey.com/au

Adrian Di Marco

Ron McLean

John Mactaggart

Kevin Blinco

Richard Anstey

Jane Andrews

Sharon Doyle

Cliff Rosenberg

Peter Ball

Company Secretary

Stephen Kennedy

Paul Jobbins

Australian Business Number

84 010 487 180

Registered Office

Technology One Limited

Level 11, TechnologyOne HQ

540 Wickham Street

Fortitude Valley  QLD  4006

Australia

www.TechnologyOneCorp.com

P. 1800 671 978

International: +617 3167 7300

McCullough Robertson

Level 11, 66 Eagle Street

Brisbane QLD 4000

www.mccullough.com.au

Share Registry

Link Market Services Limited

Locked Bag A14

Sydney NSW 1235

Phone: 02 8280 7454

Fax: 02 9287 0303

www.linkmarketservices.com.au

Stock Exchange Listing

Australian Securities Exchange  

(ASX: TNE)

2021 (Year Ending 30 September 2021)

Annual General Meeting1

Announcement of Half Year results for 2021

Media Interviews

Presentations to Institutions – Sydney (tentative) 

Presentations to Institutions – Melbourne (tentative)

Ex-Dividend for 2021 Interim Dividend2

Record date for 2021 interim dividend3

Payment date for 2021 interim dividend4

Announcement of Full Year Results for 2021

Media Interviews

Presentations to Institutions – Sydney (tentative)

Presentations to Institutions – Melbourne (tentative)

Ex-Dividend for 2021 Final Dividend2

Record date for 2021 dividend3

Payment date for 2021 final dividend4

Distribute 2021 Annual Report (tentative)

Annual General Meeting (2021 tentative)5

Notes:

23 February 2021

25 May 2021

25 May 2021

26 & 27 May 2021

28 May 2021

3 Jun 2021

4 Jun 2021

18 June 2021

23 November 2021

23 November 2021

24 & 25 November 2021

26 November 2021

2 December 2021

3 December 2021

17 December 2021

17 January 2022

22 February 2022

1Closing date for the receipt of director nominations is 4 January 2021 in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 14.3

2The Ex-dividend date occurs one business day before TechnologyOne’s Record Date. 

3The Record Date is 5.00pm on the date TechnologyOne closes its share register to determine which shareholders are entitled to receive the current dividend.  

4The Payment Date is the date on which TechnologyOne’s dividend is paid to shareholders.  The payment date is approximately 10 business days after the Record Date.

5Closing date for the receipt of director nominations is 3 January 2022 in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 14.3 (35 business days prior to AGM)

144

145

2020 TechnologyOne Annual ReportTransforming business, making life simpleEnterprise  
software,  
incredibly  
simple.

TechnologyOne (ASX: TNE) is Australia’s largest enterprise 
software company and one of Australia’s top 150 ASX-listed 
companies, with locations across six countries. We provide 
a global SaaS ERP solution that transforms business and 
makes life simple for our customers. Our deeply integrated 
enterprise SaaS solution is available on any device, anywhere 
and any time and is incredibly easy to use. Over 1,200 
leading corporations, government agencies, local councils 
and universities are powered by our software. For more than 
33 years, we have been providing our customers enterprise 
software that evolves and adapts to new and emerging 
technologies, allowing them to focus on their business and  
not technology.

ABN: 84 010 487 180

TechnologyOneCorp.com

Australia | New Zealand | South Pacific | Asia | United Kingdom
Freecall 1800 671 978 (within Australia) | +617 3167 7300 (outside Australia)